nec 120 lh user guide

296
User Guide Express 5800 120Lh

Upload: pape-cisse

Post on 28-Apr-2015

52 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

DESCRIPTION

Nec 120LH User guide

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Nec 120 Lh User guide

User Guide

Express 5800 120Lh

Page 2: Nec 120 Lh User guide
Page 3: Nec 120 Lh User guide

100Proprietary Notice and Liability Disclaimer

The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials, is thevaluable property of NEC Computers International and/or its licensors. NEC ComputersInternational and/or its licensors, as appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and otherproprietary rights to this document, including all design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, andsales rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others.

The NEC Computers International product(s) discussed in this document are warranted inaccordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However,actual performance of each product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration,customer data, and operator control. Since implementation by customers of each product mayvary, the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined bythe customer and is not warranted by NEC Computers International.

To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document is subjectto change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or portions thereof with-out prior written approval of NEC Computers International is prohibited.

Trademarks

Adobe, and Adobe Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.Microsoft, Microsoft Windows, Windows NT, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000 andWindows Storage Server 2003 are all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registeredtrademarks of their respective trademark owners.

August 2004

Copyright 2004NEC Computers International B.V.

Nieuweweg 2796603 BN WijchenThe Netherlands

All Rights Reserved

Page 4: Nec 120 Lh User guide
Page 5: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

Table of ContentsTable of Contents _______________________________________________________ iii

Using This Guide _______________________________________________________ xi

Text Conventions __________________________________________________ xiiRelated Documents _________________________________________________ xiiiSafety Notices _____________________________________________________ xiv

Safety Notices for Users Outside the U.S.A. and Canada __________________xvCare and Handling _________________________________________________ xvi

1. System Overview ____________________________________________________ 1-1

Overview _________________________________________________________ 1-2Chassis Features ___________________________________________________ 1-3System Chassis Features _____________________________________________ 1-4

Front View _____________________________________________________ 1-4Rear View _____________________________________________________ 1-7Internal View ___________________________________________________ 1-9Motherboard ___________________________________________________ 1-10

Xeon™ Processors ___________________________________________ 1-11Memory ____________________________________________________ 1-11PCI Riser Slots ______________________________________________ 1-11Video Controller _____________________________________________ 1-11SCSI Controller ______________________________________________ 1-12Network Controller ___________________________________________ 1-12Keyboard and Mouse Controller _________________________________ 1-12ACPI ______________________________________________________ 1-12Remote Management Card (RMC) _______________________________ 1-13

Standard Features _________________________________________________ 1-15Power Supply __________________________________________________ 1-17Peripheral Bays ________________________________________________ 1-17Degradation Feature _____________________________________________ 1-18AC-LINK Feature ______________________________________________ 1-18Off-line Maintenance Utility ______________________________________ 1-18System Diagnostic Utility ________________________________________ 1-19NEC DianaScope _______________________________________________ 1-19Security ______________________________________________________ 1-19

Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring ____________________ 1-19Software Locks via the System Setup Utility ________________________ 1-19

EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM ______________________________________ 1-20What You Can Do With the EXPRESSBUILDER CD __________________ 1-20Software End User License Agreement ______________________________ 1-20

iii

Page 6: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

2. Setting Up Your System _______________________________________________ 2-1

Overview _________________________________________________________ 2-2Selecting a Site ____________________________________________________ 2-3Unpacking the System ______________________________________________ 2-4Rack Version ______________________________________________________ 2-5

Unpacking the Rack Mounting Hardware _____________________________ 2-5Before Installing the Server into a Rack ______________________________ 2-7

Restricted Access Location ______________________________________ 2-7Static Precautions _____________________________________________ 2-7Required Tools _______________________________________________ 2-7

Converting your Tower Server to a Rack-Mount Server __________________ 2-8Removing the Front Door and Hinge Plat __________________________ 2-8Removing the Stabilizers ________________________________________ 2-9Installing the Device and HDD Covers _____________________________ 2-9Installing the Stabilizer Covers __________________________________ 2-11Installing the Front Bezel ______________________________________ 2-11

Installing the Server in a Rack _____________________________________ 2-12Preparing the Slide Rail Assemblies ______________________________ 2-13Defining the Location of the Server in the Rack _____________________ 2-15Installing the Rail Assemblies to the Rack Cabinet ___________________ 2-17Installing the Server in the Rack _________________________________ 2-18

Cable Arm Assembly ____________________________________________ 2-19Installing the Cable Arm Assembly _______________________________ 2-19Installing Cables _____________________________________________ 2-22Installing the Cable Arm Stopper ________________________________ 2-23

Securing the Server in the Rack ____________________________________ 2-23Removing the Server from the Rack ________________________________ 2-23

Using the System _________________________________________________ 2-24Removing the Front Door ________________________________________ 2-25Installing the Front Door _________________________________________ 2-25Floppy Disk Drive ______________________________________________ 2-26CD-ROM Drive ________________________________________________ 2-27

Making Connections _______________________________________________ 2-29Connecting the Power Cord _________________________________________ 2-31

Powering On Your System _______________________________________ 2-33Powering Off Your System _______________________________________ 2-34Forcing a Power Shutdown _______________________________________ 2-35

3. Configuring Your System _____________________________________________ 3-1

Configuring Your System ____________________________________________ 3-2BIOS Setup Utility _________________________________________________ 3-3

Starting SETUP Utility ___________________________________________ 3-3BIOS Setup Configuration Settings __________________________________ 3-4Main Menu _____________________________________________________ 3-5

Primary and Secondary Master & Slave IDE & Serial ATA Channel 0 & 1 submen-us __________________________________________________________ 3-5Processor Settings Submenu _____________________________________ 3-6

Advanced Menu _________________________________________________ 3-8Memory Configuration Submenu _________________________________ 3-8

iv

Page 7: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

PCI Configuration Submenu _____________________________________ 3-9Embedded SCSI Submenu _______________________________________ 3-9Embedded NIC (Dual Gbit) Submenu ______________________________ 3-9Embedded Video Controller Submenu ____________________________ 3-10Peripheral Configuration Submenu ______________________________ 3-10 ___________________________________________________________ 3-10Advanced Chipset Control Submenu ______________________________ 3-11

Security Menu _________________________________________________ 3-13Server Menu ___________________________________________________ 3-15

System Management Submenu __________________________________ 3-16Console Redirection Submenu ___________________________________ 3-17

Boot Menu ____________________________________________________ 3-18Exit Menu _____________________________________________________ 3-19

SCSISelect Utility _________________________________________________ 3-20Running the SCSISelect Utility ____________________________________ 3-20Adaptec SCSI Utility Configuration Settings _________________________ 3-21SCSI Disk Utilities ______________________________________________ 3-22HostRAID ____________________________________________________ 3-23Exiting Adaptec SCSI Utility ______________________________________ 3-23Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional Board ______________________ 3-23

RAID Configuration Utility _________________________________________ 3-24Configuring MotherBoard Jumpers ___________________________________ 3-25

Moving System Board Jumpers ____________________________________ 3-26Clearing and Changing the Passwords ____________________________ 3-26Clearing CMOS ______________________________________________ 3-27

4. Upgrading Your System ______________________________________________ 4-1

General Information ________________________________________________ 4-2Static Precautions __________________________________________________ 4-2Equipment Log ____________________________________________________ 4-3Tools Recommendedfor Upgrading Your System __________________________________________ 4-3Preparing Your System for Upgrade ___________________________________ 4-3Removing and Installing the Right Side Door ____________________________ 4-4

Removing the Right Side Door _____________________________________ 4-4Installing the Right Side Door ______________________________________ 4-5

Removing or Installing the Processor Air Duct ___________________________ 4-6Removing the Processor Air Duct ___________________________________ 4-6Installing the Processor Air Duct ____________________________________ 4-7

Installing and Swappinga Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-Swap Disk Drive Bay _________________________ 4-8

Installing a Hard Disk Drive ______________________________________ 4-11Swapping a Hard Disk Drive ______________________________________ 4-15Auto Rebuild Functionality _______________________________________ 4-17

Installing and Replacing a Power Supply Unit ___________________________ 4-18Installing a Power Supply Unit ____________________________________ 4-18Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit ______________________________ 4-20

Installing and Removing a Cooling Fan Unit ____________________________ 4-22Installing a Cooling Fan Unit ______________________________________ 4-22

v

Page 8: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

Removing a Cooling Fan Unit _____________________________________ 4-24Removing and Installing a Hot-Swap Fan ______________________________ 4-25

Checking a Fan Status ___________________________________________ 4-25Removing a Hot-Swap Fan _______________________________________ 4-25Installing a Hot-Swap Fan ________________________________________ 4-26

Status Indicators __________________________________________________ 4-27Lamps ________________________________________________________ 4-27

LAN ACCESS Lamp () _________________________________________ 4-27STATUS Lamp () _____________________________________________ 4-27POWER/SLEEP Lamp () _______________________________________ 4-28DISK ACCESS Lamp () ________________________________________ 4-29Access Lamps _______________________________________________ 4-29Hard Disk Drive Lamp ________________________________________ 4-29Power Supply Lamps __________________________________________ 4-31 ___________________________________________________________ 4-31LAN Connector Lamps ________________________________________ 4-32

Installing and Removing 5.25-inch Devices _____________________________ 4-33Installing a 5.25-Inch Media Device ________________________________ 4-34Removing a 5.25-Inch Media Device _______________________________ 4-38

Installing or Removing a PCI Board ___________________________________ 4-39Installing an Option Board ________________________________________ 4-40Removing an Option Board _______________________________________ 4-43

Installing or Removing a RAID Controller Board ________________________ 4-44Using Internal Disks in Disk Array Configuration _____________________ 4-45Disk Array Configuration of Additional Disk Unit _____________________ 4-46SCSI Controller Board ___________________________________________ 4-46

Installing and Removing a Microprocessor _____________________________ 4-47Installing a Microprocessor _______________________________________ 4-48Removing a Microprocessor ______________________________________ 4-52

Installing or Removing DIMM _______________________________________ 4-54DIMM _______________________________________________________ 4-54Installing DIMM _______________________________________________ 4-56Removing DIMM _______________________________________________ 4-58

Installing a Remote Management Card ________________________________ 4-59Installing a Remote Management Card ______________________________ 4-60Removing a Remote Management Card _____________________________ 4-63

Replacing the Battery ______________________________________________ 4-64Internal Cabling __________________________________________________ 4-65

Interface Cables ________________________________________________ 4-65Standard Configuration ________________________________________ 4-65Disk Array Configuration of Built-in Hard Disks ____________________ 4-65Installing a SCSI File Device ___________________________________ 4-67Connecting with Additional Disk Unit /Sample Connection in Maximum Configuration _____________________ 4-68

Power Cable ___________________________________________________ 4-70

vi

Page 9: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

5. Problem Solving _____________________________________________________ 5-1

Problem Solving ___________________________________________________ 5-2Static Precautions __________________________________________________ 5-2Resetting the Server ________________________________________________ 5-3Troubleshooting Guide ______________________________________________ 5-4

System Viewers _________________________________________________ 5-4Problems at initial System Start-up ____________________________________ 5-5Problems After the System Has Been Running Correctly ___________________ 5-6Problems Running New Application Software ____________________________ 5-7Problems and Suggestions ___________________________________________ 5-8

Problems with NEC Express Server _________________________________ 5-9Problems with Windows Server 2003 _______________________________ 5-13Problems with Windows 2000 _____________________________________ 5-13Problems with Disk Array Configuration ____________________________ 5-19Problems with Master Control Menu _______________________________ 5-19Collecting Event Log ___________________________________________ 5-20Collect Configuration Information _________________________________ 5-21Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information _______________________ 5-21Memory Dump ________________________________________________ 5-21Preparing for Memory Dumping ___________________________________ 5-22Saving the Dump File ___________________________________________ 5-22

If You Need Assistance ____________________________________________ 5-23Error Messages ___________________________________________________ 5-24

Error Messages after Power-on ____________________________________ 5-24 _____________________________________________________________ 5-24POST Error Messages ___________________________________________ 5-25

Beep Codes ______________________________________________________ 5-28How to Identify BIOS Revision Level _________________________________ 5-29Recovery for Windows 2000 ________________________________________ 5-30Off-line Maintenance Utility ________________________________________ 5-32

Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility ____________________________ 5-32Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility _____________________________ 5-32

A. Appendix A _______________________________________________________ A-1

Specifications ____________________________________________________ A-1

B. Appendix B _________________________________________________________B-1

Interrupt Reguests and I/O Port Address ________________________________B-1Interrupt Requests _______________________________________________B-1I/O Port Address _________________________________________________B-1

C. Appendix C _______________________________________________________ C-1

Maintenance ______________________________________________________C-1Making Backup Copies ___________________________________________C-1Cleaning _______________________________________________________C-1Cleaning the Server ______________________________________________C-2Cleaning the Interior _____________________________________________C-2Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse _____________________________________C-3

vii

Page 10: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

Cleaning optical drives ___________________________________________C-4System Diagnostics _________________________________________________C-6

Test Items _____________________________________________________C-6Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics __________________________C-6

Relocating/Storing The Server ________________________________________C-9

D. Appendix D _______________________________________________________ D-1

Installing the Operating System with Express Setup ______________________ D-1About Express Setup ____________________________________________ D-1Microsoft Windows Server 2003 ___________________________________ D-3

Installation Notice ____________________________________________ D-3Installing Windows Server 2003 _________________________________ D-6Installing and Setting Device Drivers ____________________________ D-10

Microsoft Windows 2000 ________________________________________ D-19Installation Notice ___________________________________________ D-19Installing and Setting Device Drivers ____________________________ D-26HostRAID _________________________________________________ D-34

E. Appendix E ________________________________________________________E-1

Installing and Using Utilities _________________________________________E-1 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ________________________________________E-1 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console ___________E-3

Starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER _______________________________E-3 DOS-Based ExpressBuilder Menus _______________________________E-3

F. Appendix F _________________________________________________________F-1

Installing Windows 2000 ____________________________________________ F-1Before Installing Windows 2000 ____________________________________ F-1Installing Windows 2000 _________________________________________ F-2

Creating "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" ____F-2Windows 2000 Clean Installation ________________________________F-4

Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives ______________________________ F-5Before Re-installing the Operation System __________________________F-5Re-installing the Operation System ________________________________F-5Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter __________________________F-5Updating the System - Installing Service Pack - _____________________F-6

Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ____________________________ F-6PROSet _____________________________________________________F-6Network Driver _______________________________________________F-7

Re-install the Network Driver ______________________________________ F-8Display Driver _______________________________________________F-8USB 2.0 Driver _______________________________________________F-8

Setting for Collecting Memory Dump ________________________________ F-8

G. Appendix G _______________________________________________________ G-1

Installing Windows Server 2003 ______________________________________ G-1Before Installing Windows Server 2003 _____________________________ G-1

Installing Service Pack ________________________________________ G-1

viii

Page 11: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

Updating System _____________________________________________ G-1Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ________________________ G-1MO Device __________________________________________________ G-1Partition Size ________________________________________________ G-1

Installing Windows Server 2003 ___________________________________ G-2Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" __________________________________ G-2Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation __________________________ G-4

Upgrade installation _____________________________________________ G-5Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives _____________________________ G-7

Before Re-installing the Operation System _________________________ G-7Re-installing the Operation System _______________________________ G-7Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter _________________________ G-7Updating the System __________________________________________ G-8

Driver Installation And Advanced Settings ___________________________ G-8PROSet ____________________________________________________ G-8Network Driver ______________________________________________ G-9Re-install the Network Driver __________________________________ G-10USB 2.0 Driver _____________________________________________ G-10

Update Graphics Accelerator Driver Mounted in Standard ___________________________________________ G-10Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) ___________________________________________ G-11

H. Appendix H _______________________________________________________ H-1

Product Configuration Record Table __________________________________ H-1

Glossary _______________________________________________________ Glossary-1

Index ____________________________________________________________ Index-1

ix

Page 12: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Table of Contents

x

Page 13: Nec 120 Lh User guide

Using This GuideThis user guide provides a reference to information about the Express 5800 120Lhserver. Its goal is to familiarize you with your system and the tasks necessary for sys-tem configuring and upgrading.

■ Chapter 1 contains information about the front, back and internal features of yoursystem and about the motherboard. It lists the standard and optional features ofyour server and provides information about the rack version of your server.

■ Chapter 2 helps you installing the server in an appropriate place, making connec-tions and starting using your server.

■ Chapter 3 shows you how to configure your server and helps you set up the variousoptions.

■ Chapter 4 provides the information you need to remove components from yoursystem and install new ones. You will find in this chapter how to install hard diskdrives, upgrade memory, install optical devices... etc.

■ Chapter 5, gives you information about how to solve the various issues you mayencounter with your system.

■ “Glossary” lists the main vocabulary used in this guide.

Page 14: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Using this Guide

xii

Text ConventionsThis guide uses the following text conventions.

WarningWarnings alert you to situations that could result in serious per-sonal injury or loss of life.

CautionCautions indicate situations that can damage the system hard-ware or software.

Note: Notes give important information about the materialbeing described.

■ Names of keyboard keys are printed as they appear on the keyboard. For example,Ctrl, Alt, or Enter.

■ Text or keystrokes that you enter appear as boldface type. For example, typeabc123 and press ENTER.

■ File names are printed in uppercase letters. For example, AUTOEXEC.BAT.

Page 15: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Using this Guide

xiii

Related DocumentsIn addition to this guide, the following system documentation may be included withyour system either as electronic files (on the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM) or aspaper copy shipped with your server.

■ System Release NotesRelease Notes provide you with the latest information about your system. Thisinformation was not available to be included in your user's guide at the time it wasdeveloped and released.

Page 16: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Using this Guide

Safety Notices

■ Caution: To reduce the risk of electric shock which could cause personal injury,follow all safety notices. The symbols shown are used in your documentation andon your equipment to indicate safety hazards.

■ Warning: Lithium batteries can be dangerous. Improper handling of lithium bat-teries may result in an explosion. Dispose of lithium batteries as required by localordinance or as normal waste if no local ordinance exists.

■ Warning: The detachable power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnectdevice.

■ Warning: This equipment has a 3-wire, grounded power cord. To prevent electri-cal hazards, do not remove or defeat the ground prong on the power cord. Replacethe power cord if it gets damaged. Contact your dealer for an exact replacement.

■ Warning: The DC push-button on/off switch on the front panel does not turn offthe system AC power. Also, +5vdc is present on the system board whenever theAC power cord is connected between the system and an AC outlet. Before doingthe procedures in this manual, make sure that your system is powered off andunplug the AC power cord from the back of the chassis. Failure to disconnectpower before opening your system can result in personal injury and equipmentdamage.

In the U.S.A. and Canada, the power cord must be a UL-listed detachable power cord(in Canada, CSA-certified), type ST or SJT, 16 AWG, 3-conductor, provided with amolded-on NEMA type 5-15 P plug cap at one end and a molded-on cord connectorbody at the other end. The cord length must not exceed 9 feet (2.7 meters).

Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, the plug must be rated for 250 VAC, 10 amp minimum,and must display an international agency approval marking. The cord must be suitablefor use in the end-user country. Consult your dealer or the local electrical authorities ifyou are unsure of the type of power cord to use in your country. The voltage changeoccurs via a switch in the power supply.

■ Warning: Under no circumstances should the user attempt to disassemble thepower supply. The power supply has no user-replaceable parts. Inside the powersupply are hazardous voltages that can cause serious personal injury. A defectivepower supply must be returned to your dealer.

!

xiv

Page 17: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Using this Guide

Safety Notices for Users Outside the U.S.A. and Canada■ PELV (Protected Extra-Low Voltage) Integrity: To ensure the extra-low voltage

integrity of the equipment, connect only equipment with mains-protected electri-cally-compatible circuits to the external ports.

■ Remote Earths: To prevent electrical shock, connect all local (individual office)computers and computer support equipment to the same electrical circuit of thebuilding wiring. If you are unsure, check the building wiring to avoid remote earthconditions.

■ Earth Bonding: For safe operation, only connect the equipment to a building sup-ply that is in accordance with current wiring regulations in your country. In theU.K., those regulations are the IEE.

xv

Page 18: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Using this Guide

xvi

Care and HandlingUse the following guidelines to properly handle and care for your system.

Protect the system from extremely low or high temperatures. Let the system warm (or cool) to room temperature before using it.

Keep the system away from magnetic forces.

Keep the system dry. Do not wash the system with a wet cloth or pour fluid into it.

Protect the system from being bumped or dropped.

Check the system for condensation. If condensation exists, allow it to evaporate before powering on the system.

Keep the system away from dust, sand, and dirt.

Page 19: Nec 120 Lh User guide

1System Overview

■ Overview

■ Chassis Features

■ System Chassis Features

■ Standard Features

■ EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM100System Overview

Page 20: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

1 - 2

OverviewThe Express 5800 120Lh is a modular, multiprocessing server based on the Intel®Xeon microprocessor family. It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology.The combination of compute performance, memory capacity, and integrated I/Oprovides a high performance environment for many server market applications. Theserange from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking toobtain basic connectivity capability such a file and print services, e-mail, web access,web site server, etc.

This server is conveniently housed and available as a tower-based system or as a rack-mount system (fits into a standard EIA 19-inch rack assembly).

Figure 1 - 1 : Tower-based 120Lh Front View

Your server may include hot-swap SCSI hard disk drive bays. The hot-swap SCSI harddisk drive bays hold up to six 1.0-inch SCSI hard disk drives that can be swapped in orout of the system without powering it down, if RAID is configured in the system.

As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additionalprocessor, additional memory, add-in boards and peripheral devices, tape devices, CD-ROM, and hard disk drives.

Page 21: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

1 - 3

Chassis FeaturesYour server features the following major components:

■ Single or dual high-performance Pentium Xeon processors in a 608 pin Intel Xeonprocessor socket.

■ 512 MB up to 16 GB of ECC SDRAM (DDR266) or 12 GB of ECC SDRAM(DDR333) two way interleaved memory, using up to four DIMMs.

■ Six PCI expansion slots for add-in boards (two 64-bit/100MHz PCI-X slots, one64-bit/133MHz PCI-X slot, two PCI Express (x8) slots) and one 32-bit/33MHzPCI slot.

■ A maximum of six hot-swap SCSI hard disk drive bays accessible from the front ofthe chassis plus an optional three hot-swap SCSI hard disk drive bay.

■ Hot-swap SCSI disk drive backplane; a failed drive can be removed and replacedwith a new drive without system power being turned off (if an optional RedundantArray of Independent Disks (RAID) controller is installed.)

■ High degree of SCSI disk fault tolerance and advanced disk array management fea-tures through the use of RAID technology, if an optional RAID controller isinstalled.

■ Embedded PC-compatible support (serial, parallel, mouse, keyboard, diskette,USB, LAN, and video).

■ Integrated onboard ATI RAGE XL Video Graphics Array (VGA) controller with8MB of video memory (VRAM).

■ Adaptec SCSI controller providing Ultra-320/160 SCSI interfaces.

■ Integrated Network Interface Controller (NIC), a dual channel Gigabit EthernetLAN controller supporting 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T network systems.

■ On-board enhanced IDE interface controller (ATA100 × 2)

■ Four slots, 5.25-inch removable media device bay.

■ IDE CD-ROM drive and 3 ½-inch diskette drive.

■ Two integrated Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) ports, located at the rear panel.

■ Hardware monitors (temperature, fans, and voltage) and software monitors to indi-cate failures.

■ Optional Remote Management Board controller.

■ Chassis that supports up to two power supply modules. The additional power sup-ply is needed to provide hot-swappable redundant power (i.e., the system will con-tinue to operate with a single power supply failure). With two power modulesinstalled, one power module can be easily removed or installed from the back ofthe chassis without turning the system power off.

■ Fully lockable front bezel including Server Management software that monitorsthe front bezel intrusion switch.

Page 22: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

System Chassis Features

Front View

Figure 1 - 2 : 120Lh Front View (Door Closed)

1 Front doorOpen this door to access the POWER switch, 5.25-inch devices, the CD-ROM drive, or the floppy disk drive, or to install/remove hard disks into the 3.5-inch bays. You can lock the front door using the provided security key.

2 Key holeInsert the security key to lock/unlock the front door.

3 StabilizersUse the four stabilizers to prevent the server from falling down.

4 LAN ACCESS lamp (green)Lights in green while the server is connected to the network. Blinking in green indicates the network activity. Numbers printed near the lamps indicate the LAN port number.

5 DISK ACCESS lamp (green/amber)Lights in green while the internal hard disk is being accessed. When any one of the internal hard disks fails, this lamp lights in amber.

6 POWER/SLEEP lamp (green)Lights in green when the server is powered on. Flashing green indicates that the system is in the sleep mode.

7 STATUS lamp (green/amber)Lights in green while the server is in operating normally. When any error is detected, this lamp lights in amber.

1 2

1 2

4 3

6

7 8 9

5

1 - 4

Page 23: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Front View (Door Opened)

Figure 1 - 3 : 120Lh Front View (Door Opened)

Figure 1 - 4 : CD-ROM Drive and Floppy Disk Drive

CD-ROM Drive Floppy Disk Drive

1 2

1 27

4 3

8

10

9

8

6

5

2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6

5-1

5-2

5-3

1 - 5

Page 24: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

1 5.25-inch device bay

Backup tape drives may be installed in the 5.25-inch device bay.2 CD-ROM drive

The CD-ROM drive reads data from the inserted CD-ROM.(Depending on your hardware configuration, a DVD-ROM or a CD R/W drive may be installed.)

2-1 Headphone jack2-2 Volume control2-3 Access lamp (lights in amber while being accessed)2-4 CD-ROM slot2-5 Emergency hole2-6 Open/Close button

3 Disk lamp (green/amber)

The disk lamp is lit green if a hard disk installed in the server is accessed. If a hard disk is defected, the lamp is lit amber. During the rebuild processing, the lamp is lit green or amber alternately. (This occurs only in the disk array configuration.)

4 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay

The 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay contains up to six hard disks. Hard disks having the thickness of 1 inch can be inserted into the slots.

The SCSI IDs are defined as follows: ID0 to ID5 from bottom to top.5 3.5-inch floppy disk drive

Insert a 3.5-inch floppy disk to the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive to read data from the disk or write data to the disk.

5-1: Eject button

5-2: Disk inserting section

5-3: Floppy disk access lamp (lit green during accessing)6 Cover open sensor

The cover open sensor detects the opening of the front door.7 Power switch

The power switch is used to turn on/off the power. If you press the switch once, then the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes on and the power is turned on. If you press the switch again, the power is turned off. The system is forcibly shut down when the power switch is pressed continuously for four seconds or longer.

8 Lamps9 Reset switch

The reset switch is used to reset the server.10 Dump switch (NMI switch)

Non-maskable Interrupt switch.The dump switch is used to collect the event logs having occurred in the server.

1 - 6

Page 25: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Rear ViewThe following figure shows the redundant hot-plug power supply model. On modelswith a non-redundant power supply (a fixedpower supply is installed), components 2,4, 5 and 6 are not present.

Figure 1 - 5 : 120Lh Rear View

1 Power supplyThe power unit supplies DC power to the server.

2 HandleGrasp this handle to install or remove the power supply.

3 AC inletThe AC inlet is connected with the power cord.

4 Power lampThe Power lamp blinks green if the power supply receives the AC power through the power cord. The lamp goes on green when the power of the server is turned on.

5 Power fail lampThe amber lamp goes on if the power is defected.

6 Additional power supply slotAn optional power supply may be installed in the slot.

10 9 1 2 3 4 5

6

7

18-1 18-2 17 8

11

12

13

14

15191617

16

1 - 7

Page 26: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

7 Serial port B connectorsThe serial port B connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface. The server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector.

8 Additional PCI board slotsOptional PCI boards may be inserted into the slots.

9 Mouse connectorThe mouse connector is connected with the mouse coming with the server.

10 Keyboard connectorThe keyboard connector is connected with the keyboard coming with the server.

11 USB-1 and USB-2 connectorsThe USB-1 and USB-2 connectors are connected with devices accepting the USB interface. Connector 1 to connector 2 are assigned from right to left.

12 Serial port A connectorThe serial port A connector is connected with a device having the serial interface.

13 Printer port connectorThe printer port connector is connected with a printer with the Centronics interface.

14 Monitor connectorThe monitor connector is connected with the display unit.

15 Unit ID switchNot used in this system.

16 Link/ACT lampThe Link/ACT lamp shows the LAN access status.

17 Speed lampIndicates the LAN transfer rate.

18 LAN connector(s)The LAN connectors are connected with a network system on LAN. The value following the bold-faced number indicates the port number.Your server supports 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T network subsystem.

19 Dump switch (NMI switch)Pressing this switch to dump system memory.

1 - 8

Page 27: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

1 - 9

Internal View

Figure 1 - 6 : 120Lh Internal View

1 Power supply2 Air duct3 Front cooling fan (Fan 3)4 5.25-inch device bays (four slots)

A standard CD-ROM drive is installed in slot #3.5 3.5-inch floppy disk drive6 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay

The hard disk drive bay can hold up to six 1.0-inch hot-swap SCSI hard disk drives.7 Cooling fan (Fan 2: option)8 Motherboard9 Rear cooling fan (Fan5)

9

1 2 3 4

5

8 7 6

Page 28: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Motherboard

Figure 1 - 7: 120Lh Motherboard

1 DIMM sockets (slots 1 to 8 from top to bottom)2 Power signal connector (redundant hot-plug power supply only3 Power connector4 Cooling fan connector (Fan 3)5 Processor 1 socket6 Power connector (CPU)7 Processor 2 socket8 Cooling fan signal connector (Fan 2: redundant)9 Cooling fan connector (Fan 2: option)10 IDE connector (for CD-ROM drive)11 Floppy disk drive connector12 Ultra320(B) connector (for internal file devices)13 Ultra320 (A) connector (for built-in hard disk)14 Remote management card slot

1 2 3 4 5 6

7

89

10

11

25

2423

22

21 19 18 1716 15 14

12

20 13

1 - 10

Page 29: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Xeon™ Processors

Depending on system configuration, each system includes one or two Intel Xeon2.80 GHz or 3.60 GHz processors. Each processor plugs into a FC-mPGA4 socketpackage. The processor includes a 1 M cache. When two processors are installed, bothprocessors must be of identical bus and core speed.

The processor external interface operates at a maximum of 800 MHz.

Memory

The server board contains four 184-pin DIMM sockets. Memory is partitioned as fourbanks of registered SDRAM DIMMs (DDR333 compatible) that must be populated inpairs, each providing 72 bits of buffered two-way interleaved memory (64-bit mainmemory plus ECC). Your system may include from 512 MB to 16 GB of memory,using up to four DIMM's banks.

PCI Riser Slots

The server's expansion capabilities meet the needs of file and application servers forhigh performance I/O by providing PCI expansion slots.

The server board has two full-length, full height 64-bit/100MHz PCI slots, one full-length, full height 64-bit/133MHz PCI slot, one 32-bit/33MHz PCI slot and two PCIExpress (x 8) slots.

Video Controller

The system board uses an ATI RAGE XL PCI graphics accelerator with 8 MB of videoSDRAM. The embedded SVGA video subsystem supports:

■ Resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 under 2D and 1024 x 768 under 3D

■ CRT and LCD monitors up to 100 Hz vertical refresh rate.

15 Front panel interface connector16 USB connector17 Serial ATA connectors18 Speaker19 Jumper switch for clearing CMOS20 Jumper switch for clearing BIOS password21 Chassis intrusion connector22 PCI board slots

slots PCI #1, PCI #2, PCI #3, PCI #4, PCI #5, and PCI #6 arranged from bottom to topPCI #6: 64-bit, 133MHz, PCI-XPCI #5, #4: PCI EXPRESS (8-bus)PCI #3, #2: 64-bit, 100MHz, PCI-XPCI #1: 32-bit, 33MHz, PCI

23 Rear cooling fan connector (Fan 5)24 Lithium battery25 Serial (COM B) connector

1 - 11

Page 30: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

The server board supports disabling of the onboard video through the BIOS setup menuor when a plug in video card is installed in any of the PCI slots.

SCSI Controller

The server board includes an embedded Adaptec AIC7902 SCSI controller. TheAIC7902 provides Ultra-320/160 SCSI functions. As implemented on the systemboard, the interface attaches to an Ultra-320/160 SCSI backplane that supports up to sixUltra-320/160 SCA drives.

Network Controller

The server board uses a dual-channel Ethernet Controller and supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T network subsystems.

The Network controller supports the following features:

■ 32-bit, 33/66 MHz PCI interface

■ IEEE 802.3x-compliant flow-control compatible PHY

■ IEEE 802.3ab auto-negotiation support

■ Full duplex support at 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps operation

■ Automatic link speed switching from 1000Mb/s down

■ Low power +3.3 V devices.

Keyboard and Mouse Controller

The keyboard/mouse controller is PS/2-compatible.

ACPI

The Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) aware operating system canplace the system into a state where the hard drives spin down, some system fans stop,and all processing is halted. However, in this state the power supply is still on and theprocessors are still dissipating some power such that the power supply fan and somesystem fans are still running.

Note: ACPI requires an operating system that supports itsfeature.

1 - 12

Page 31: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

This server system BIOS supports sleep states s0, s1, s4, and s5.

CautionOnly when the AC power is disconnected is the system com-pletely off.

The sleep states are defined as follows:

■ s0: Normal running state.

■ s1: Processor sleep state.No context will be lost in this state and the processor caches will maintaincoherency.

■ s4: Hibernate or Save to Disk.The memory and machine state are saved to disk. Pressing the power button orother wake up event restores the system state from the disk and resumes normaloperation. This assumes that no hardware changes have been made to the systemwhile it was off.

■ s5: Soft off.Only the RTC section of the chip set and the BMC are running in this state.

Remote Management Card (RMC)

Server management is concentrated in the optional Remote Management Card (RMC).The RMC and associated circuitry are powered from a 5Vdc standby voltage, whichremains active when system power is switched off, but the AC power source is still onand connected.

The RMC supports the NEC DianaScope, which allows remote server management viaa modem or direct connection to a manager system. Events monitored by the managersystem include over temperature and over voltage conditions, fan failure, or chassisintrusion.

Information on NEC DianaScope may be found in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

One major function of the RMC is to autonomously monitor system managementevents, and log their occurrence in the nonvolatile System Event Log (SEL). Theevents being monitored include over temperature and over voltage conditions, fanfailure, or chassis intrusion. To enable accurate monitoring, the RMC maintains thenonvolatile Sensor Data Records (SDRs), from which sensor information can beretrieved. The RMC provides an ISA host interface to SCR sensor information, so thatsoftware running on the server can poll and retrieve the server's current status.

1 - 13

Page 32: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

The RMC performs the following:

■ Monitors server board temperature and voltage*

■ Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot (FRB)

■ Detects and indicates baseboard fan failure*

■ Manages the SEL interface

■ Manages the SDR Repository interface

■ Monitors the SDR/SEL timestamp clock

■ Monitors the system management watchdog timer

■ Monitors the periodic SMI timer

■ Monitors the event receiver

■ Controls secure mode, including video blanking, diskette write-protect monitoring,and front panel lock/unlock initiation

■ Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support.

*Also, NEC ESMPRO supports these features.

1 - 14

Page 33: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Standard FeaturesHigh performance

■ Intel® Xeon 2.8 GHz or 3.6 GHzProcessor

■ High-speed 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T in te r face (1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps supported)

■ High-speed disk access (Ultra320 SCSI)

■ USB 2.0

High reliability

■ Memory monitoring feature (single-biterror correction/double bit errordetection)

■ CPU/memory/cooling fan degradationfeature (logical isolation of a faileddevice)

■ Bus parity error detection

■ Temperature detection

■ Error notification

■ Internal CPU fan monitoring feature

■ Internal voltage monitoring feature

■ BIOS password feature

■ Security feature (security lock)

■ Redundant power supplies (1+1)

■ Onboard SCSI RAID controller (HostRAID)

Management utilities

■ NEC ESMPRO

■ NEC DianaScope

Power Saving Feature

■ Sleep feature (available for Windows2000/ Windows 2003)

E

A

1

xpandability

■ Wide variety of optional I/O slotsTwo PCI EXPRESS (8-bus) slotsOne 64-bit, 133MHz PCI-X slotTwo 64-bit, 100 MHz PCI-X slotsOne 32-bit, 33 MHz PCI slot

■ 512 MB to 12 GB of DDR333 SDRAMor 16 GB of DDR266 SDRAMtwo way interleaved memory, using upto eight DIMMs

■ Six SCSI hard disk drive bays(hot-swappable)

■ Optional three SCSI hard disk drivebays (hot-swappable)

■ Remote power-on feature

■ Up to two Intel® Xeon processors

■ Two hot-swap power supplies(Redundancy)

■ USB interface (A USB-support driveris required.)

■ Convert to rack-mount type

vailable features

■ Graphic accelerator "RADEON7000"support

■ El Torito Bootable CD-ROM(no emulation mode) format support

■ POWER switch mask

■ Software power-off

■ Remote power-on feature

■ AC-LINK feature

■ Intelligent Platform ManagementInterface (IPMI)

■ Remote Management Card (option)

■ Remote console feature

- 15

Page 34: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Self-diagnosis

■ Power On Self-Test (POST)

■ Test and Diagnosis

Maintenance Features

■ Off-line Maintenance Utility

■ Memory dump feature using the DUMP(NMI) switch

E

1

asy and Fine Setup

■ EXPRESSBUILDER (system setuputility)

■ SETUP (BIOS SETUP utility)

■ SCSISelect (SCSI device and Hos-tRAID utility)

■ Configuration Diskette Creator

- 16

Page 35: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Power SupplyThe system contains one auto-sensing 570-watt power supply at an operating frequencyof 50/60 Hz.

A second optional power supply may be added as part of a fault-tolerant hot-swapdesign. With two power supplies installed, in the unlikely event of a power supply fail-ure, the load is transferred to the remaining power supply without interruption to nor-mal operation. In this case the faulty power supply can be replaced without poweringdown the system.

Note: The power supplies are not hot-swappable unlessthere are two power supplies installed.

The power supplies are designed to comply with existing emission standards and pro-vide sufficient power for a fully loaded system configuration.

Peripheral BaysThe system supports a variety of standard PC AT-compatible peripheral devices. Thechassis includes these peripheral bays:

■ A 3.5-inch front panel bay for installing the standard 3.5-inch floppy disk drive(supports 720 KB and 1.44 MB floppy disk media)

■ Four 5.25-inch device bays for installing half-height or full-height 5.25-inchperipheral devices such as an optional tape drives or an optional three SCSI harddisk drive bays for installing up to six SCSI hard disk drives.

■ The SCSI hard disk drive bays for installing up to six SCSI hard disk drives.

The SCSI disk drives can be easily installed or removed. The drive carrier allows youto access to disk drives from the front of the system. If disk drives are provided withRAID configuration within the system, a disk drive can be swapped with another with-out power interruption in the system (hot-swap).

Note: The SCSI hard disk drive bays contain a hot-swapback plane that require an 80-pin single connector attachment(SCA) connector on the drives that you install.

1 - 17

Page 36: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

Degradation FeatureIf a CPU or a memory DIMM error was detected during execution of POST (Power OnSelf-Test) after system power is turned on, the reconfiguration function isolates thefailed CPU or memory DIMM and continues operation. You should replace the faileddevice as soon as possible.This function is enabled only when either of the following system requirements is met:

■ two CPUs are installed,

■ two memory DIMMs are installed.

Failed DIMMs and processors may be identified on the screen that the POST displays,or with the BIOS SETUP utility. They may also be identified on the system that has theNEC ESMPRO installed.

Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a specialpacket from the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server isoff-powered.

To enable this feature, use the BIOS setup utility (See “BIOS Setup Utility” on page 3-3.)

The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases:

■ Abnormal previous system shut-down

■ No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord,power blackout, etc.)

AC-LINK FeatureWhen the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply(UPS) unit, the server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over thepower supply from the UPS to the server. The AC-LINK feature can be enabled or dis-abled with the Power Management Setup in the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility.Refer to chapter 3 for details.

NEC ESMPROThe NEC ESMPRO is a server management software that runs on the OS. The NECESMPRO includes the NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal andthe NEC ESMPRO Agent for the NEC Express server.

Off-line Maintenance UtilityThe Off-line Maintenance Utility is used for proactive maintenance and fault analysisof the server. Normally this utility is used by the maintenance engineer.Refer to Chapter 5 for details.

1 - 18

Page 37: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

System Diagnostic UtilityThe system diagnostic utility contained in the EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to preventthe hardware failures.

NEC DianaScopeThe NEC DianaScope is a software for the remote management of the NECExpress5800 series. The NEC DianaScope can control the managed server even if OSis not running on the managed server. To use the NEC DianaScope, you need to pur-chase the separately priced server license.

See the online document in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

SecurityTo help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system, the system includes a fulllockable front panel and Server Management software that monitors the system intru-sion switches.

Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring

The front door of the server contains a mechanical lock to prevent access to the front ofthe computer chassis.

The computer chassis includes an intrusion switch for the front cover and intrusion/interlock switches for the right side door (as viewed from the front). When any thesecovers are opened, the switch transmits an alarm signal to the system board, whereserver management software processes the signal. The right side door switch also oper-ates as interlock switch.

Software Locks via the System Setup Utility

The BIOS SETUP Utility provides a number of security features to prevent unautho-rized or accidental access to the system. Once the security measures are enabled, accessto the system is allowed only after the user enters the correct password(s).

For example:

■ Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reacti-vate the keyboard and mouse after a specified time-out period - 2 to 120 minutes.

■ Set and enable an administrative password.

■ Set and enable a user password

■ Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the frontpanel reset and power switches.

■ Activate a hot-key combination to enter secure mode quickly.

■ Disable writing to the floppy disk drive when secure mode is set.

1 - 19

Page 38: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - System Overview

1 - 20

EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM

What You Can Do With the EXPRESSBUILDER CD■ Create diskettes (third party software drivers).

■ Do Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 Hard Disk Installation using ExpressSetup. See “Installing the Operating System with Express Setup” on page D-1.

Software End User License AgreementCarefully read the terms and conditions of the Software End User License Agreementprinted on the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM sleeve.

Page 39: Nec 120 Lh User guide

2Setting Up Your System

■ Overview

■ Selecting a Site

■ Unpacking the System

■ Rack Version

■ Making Connections

■ Connecting the Power Cord

■ Using the System

Page 40: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

OverviewThis chapter describes how to select a site, unpack the system, make cable connections,and power on the system units. Information on front and rear panel features, switchesand LEDs are also included in this chapter.

2 - 2

Page 41: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Selecting a SiteThe system operates reliably in a typical office environment.Choose a site that is:

■ Near grounded, three-pronged power outlets.

Note: For the United States and Canada, this means aNEMA 6-15R outlet for 200-240 VAC. The system cannot beused on a NEMA 5-15R outlet for 100-120 VAC. For otherinternational sites, this means three-pronged power outletsapplicable for the electrical code of the region.

WarningBe sure the power service connection is through a properlygrounded outlet.

■ Clean, dust-free, and well ventilated. Every side ventilating openings kept free ofobstructions. Away from sources of heat, vibration or physical shock.

■ Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields and electrical noise produced byelectrical devices (such as air conditioners, large fans, large electric motors, radioand TV transmitters, and high-frequency security devices)

■ Spacious enough around the server to allow proper cooling, airflow, and cableclearance.

CautionMake sure to leave enough space behind the server. Not doingso may result in overheating and damaging the server.

■ Easily accessible for server maintenance and installation of server upgrades.

2 - 3

Page 42: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

2 - 4

Unpacking the SystemWhen you receive your server, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. Ifthe shipping boxes are damaged, note the damage, and if possible, photograph it forreference. After removing the contents of the containers, keep the cartons and thepacking materials. If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes, file adamage claim with the carrier immediately.

WarningThe hot-swap system can weigh up to 35 kg. If the system con-tains numerous optional boards and peripheral devices, it willweigh more. To avoid personal injury, make sure you havesomeone help you lift or move the server.

Page 43: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Rack VersionThis section provides instructions for assembling the rack-mount 120Lh server into astandard EIA 19-inch rack cabinet.

Unpacking the Rack Mounting HardwareAlthough the rack mounting hardware is inspected and carefully packaged at thefactory, damage may occur during shipping.

To unpack the rack mounting hardware:

1. Inspect the shipping containers and notify your carrier immediately of anydamage.

2. Carefully remove the rack mounting hardware and check the parts (see thefollowing figure and table).If parts are missing or the hardware is damaged, notify your serverrepresentative.

Figure 2 - 1 : Rack Mounting Hardware

2 - 5

Page 44: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Table 2 - 1: Rack Mount PartsReference Part Name QTY Notes1 Front Bezel 12 Slide Rail Assembly 23 Cable Retention Arm 14 Cable Arm Bracket 15 Cable Arm Stopper 16 Adapter Bracket (1) 1 Used when the distance between the front

and rear vertical mounting rails is from 700 to 742mm

7 Adapter Bracket (2) 1 Used when the distance between the front and rear vertical mounting rails is from 745 to 900mm

8 Stabilizer Cover 49 Device Cover 3 For the 5.25" device bay10 HDD Cover (1) 1 Used on models equipped with fixed HDDs11 HDD Cover (2) 1 Used on models equipped with hot-swap

HDDs12 Template 113 Model Name Label 114 Icon Label 115 Washer 8 Used to secure the slide rail assemblies16 Screw A 8 M4 bind-head screws (color: gold)17 Screw B 10 M5 bind-head screws18 Screw C 8 #6-32 UNC pan-head screws (color: silver)19 Screw D 11 M4 pan-head screws with washer (color: gold)20 Screw E 12 M4 cross-recessed pan-head screws used

with racks equipped with non-"L" shaped vertical mounting rails

21 Cable Tie 10

2 - 6

Page 45: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Before Installing the Server into a Rack

Warning■ Be sure that power to the server is turned off and unplugged.

All voltage is removed only when the power cords areunplugged.

■ Do not use any rack which does not conform to the relevantstandard.

■ Avoid excessive vibration and shock. Dropping an electroniccomponent can cause serious damage.

■ Do not install the server on the rack leaving the right sidedoor removed.

■ Do not disconnect or remove parts other than those speci-fied in the procedure.

■ Do not touch I/O connector pins.

Restricted Access Location

The server is intended for installation in a Restricted Access Location, mounted abovea non-combustible material.

Static Precautions

An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and othercomponents. You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strapattached to chassis ground when handling server components.

Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, keepthem in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your server.

Required Tools

Prepare a Phillips screwdriver to install the server in the rack.

2 - 7

Page 46: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Converting your Tower Server to a Rack-Mount Server

Removing the Front Door and Hinge Plat

1. Press the plastic clip in towards the chassis.2. Pull the hinge pin out with one hand while supporting the door with the other.3. Slide the door to remove it from the other hinge pin.4. Remove the hinge pins and save them for future use.

Figure 2 - 2 : Removing the Front Door and Hinge Plate

5. Remove the four screws attaching the hinge plate to the chassis and save themfor future use.

6. Remove the hinge plate.7. Save the hinge plate for future use.8. Remove the five nylon rivets from the top cover.

1 Nylon rivets 3 Door hinge2 Front door 4 Hinge pin

12

3

4

2 - 8

Page 47: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Removing the Stabilizers

1. Place the server on its right side (as viewed from the front) on a coveredsurface to avoid scratches to the side panel.

2. Remove the eight screws that attach the four stabilizers to the bottom of thechassis.

3. Remove the stabilizers and save them for future use.

Figure 2 - 3 : Removing the Stabilizers

Installing the Device and HDD Covers

1. Attach the device covers to the EMI shields protecting the empty 5.25-inchdevice bays of the server using the screws securing the EMI shields to theserver chassis.

1 Device cover

Figure 2 - 4 : Removing the Device Covers

1 Stabilizer2 Front door

1

2

1

2 - 9

Page 48: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

2. Attach the appropriate HDD cover to the inside of the front bezel usingscrews (D).

■ If your model is equipped with fixed hard disk drives (4 slots), secure theHDD cover (1) to the front bezel (3) using four screws (D).

Figure 2 - 5 : Installing the HDD Cover (1)

■ If your model is equipped with hot-swap hard disk drives (4 slots), securethe HDD cover (2) to the front bezel (3) using two screws (D).

Figure 2 - 6 : Installing the HDD Cover (2)

Note: Do not install a HDD cover onto the front bezel if yourserver is equipped with 6 hot-swap SCSI hard disk drive bays.

1

3

3

2

2 - 10

Page 49: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Installing the Stabilizer Covers

Attach the four stabilizer covers (1) to the bottom of the server using four screws (C).

1 Stabilizer cover 2 Front bezel

Figure 2 - 7 : Installing the Stabilizer Covers and the Front Bezel

Installing the Front Bezel

Attach the front bezel (2) to the front of the server using four screws (C). See Figure 2-7.

21

2 - 11

Page 50: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Installing the Server in a RackThe following subsection describes how to assemble your rack-mount server into astandard EIA 19-inch rack cabinet.

Before you begin select an appropriate location in your rack cabinet for the rack-mountserver. To improve rack stability, mount heavier items towards the bottom of the rackcabinet. If the rack is a stand-alone unit and the rack is more than 75 % filled withcomponents, consider installing an optional stabilizer kit.

Note: When planning your server configuration for the rackcabinet you should consider the length of the cables thatinterconnect system components.

Warning■ ANCHOR THE EQUIPMENT RACK: The equipment rack

must be anchored to an unmovable support to prevent itfrom falling over when one or more servers are extended infront of it on slide assemblies. The anchors must be able towithstand a force of up to 113 kg (250 lbs). You must alsoconsider the weight of any other device installed in the rack.

■ MAIN AC POWER DISCONNECT: You are responsible forinstalling an AC power disconnect for the entire rack unit.This main disconnect must be readily accessible, and it mustbe labeled as controlling power to the entire unit, not just tothe server(s).

■ GROUNDING THE RACK INSTALLATION: To avoid thepotential for an electrical shock hazard, you must include athird wire safety grounding conductor with the rack installa-tion. If a server power cord is plugged into an AC outlet thatis part of the rack, then you must provide proper groundingfor the rack itself. If server power cords are plugged into wallAC outlets, the safety grounding conductor in each powercord provides proper grounding only for the server. You mustprovide additional, proper grounding for the rack and otherdevices installed in it.

2 - 12

Page 51: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Preparing the Slide Rail Assemblies

1. Locate the two rack mounting rail assemblies. Each rail assembly consists of astationary rail attached to the server and a removable sliding rail. The slide railassembly ships as an assembled unit.

Figure 2 - 8 : Slide Rail Assembly

CautionIf the slide rail assemblies are to be mounted on an old rackmodel equipped with non-"L" shaped vertical mounting rails, thescrews (5) securing the front and rear mounting brackets mustbe replaced by screws E to ease slide rail installation. If yourrack cabinet was purchased after 2001, it is equipped with "L"shaped vertical mounting rails offering the least possible inter-ference to server rails. In this case, the screws (5) do not needto be replaced.

2. To remove the inner rail from each slide rail assembly:■ Position the slide rail assembly on a flat surface with the inner rail facing

up.

■ Fully extend the three telescoping slide bars until they lock in place (seeprevious figure).

■ While pressing up on the inner rail release lever, slide the inner rail out ofthe assembly and set it aside for installation on the server.

1 Slide rail assembly2 Outer rail3 Inner rail4 Release lever5 Screws

1

2 3

4

5

5

2 - 13

Page 52: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

3. Attach the inner rails to both sides of the server using eight screws (A).

Figure 2 - 9 : Attaching Inner Rails to the Server

4. With each slide rail assembly on a flat surface, extend the outer rail and loosenthe three screws securing the rear mounting bracket.

Figure 2 - 10 : Loosening the Rear Mounting Bracket Screws

1 Outer rail 3 Rear mounting bracket2 Slide rail assembly 4 Screws

1

2

3

4

2 - 14

Page 53: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Defining the Location of the Server in the Rack

The template supplied with your rack mount kit defines the location of the mountingscrews in the rack cabinet where the server is to be installed. The template can beplaced on the front and rear of the rack cabinet to show the mounting screw holepositions of the server guide rail assemblies, front bezel, and cable retention armbracket.

Note: Ensure that the template is aligned properly so thatthe mounting screw hole cut outs are at the same height oneach side of the cabinet and level with each other.The front of the template defines the front rail mounting screwholes and front bezel screw holes of the server in the rackcabinet. The back of the template defines the rear rail mountingscrew holes of the server in the rack cabinet and the screwholes for the cable arm bracket.

Figure 2 - 11 : Template

A Front sideB Rear side1 Caged nut positions2 Cable arm position3 Slide rail positions

1 2

1

3 3

A B

2 - 15

Page 54: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

To mark the front and rear screw hole locations of the server in the rack cabinet:

1. Determine where you want to install the server in the rack cabinet:■ To improve rack stability, mount the server towards the bottom of the

rack cabinet.

■ If there are units already installed, install the server into the next emptyspace from the bottom of the rack cabinet.

2. Use the template supplied with your rack mount kit to mark the front and rearmounting screw hole locations (with a pencil) where you want the server to bemounted for the slide rail assemblies, front bezel thumbscrew holes, and cableretention arm bracket. See the previous Figure 2-11.

Note: For vertical reference, every three screw holes on therack vertical mounting rail are equal to 1U (1.75 inches). Mounting holes in the vertical rails of equipment racks arecommonly spaced in a 5/8 x 5/8 x 1/2-inch sequence. Performthe following steps carefully; brackets must be mounted withprecision to allow room for the next server you install in therack.

3. To insert caged nuts in their marked locations on the front and rear verticalmounting:

■ Position the caged nut on the inside of the vertical mounting rail.

■ Hook the side lip of the caged nut into the square hole in the rail.

■ Push the other side lip of the caged nut into the square hole in the railuntil it is secured.

■ Repeat for each caged nut.

Figure 2 - 12 : Inserting the Caged Nuts

2 - 16

Page 55: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Installing the Rail Assemblies to the Rack Cabinet

1. Measure the distance between the front and rear vertical mounting rails of yourrack. You'll use this measurement for a preliminary adjustment of the sliderails in the next step.

2. Adjust each slide rail to the approximate length measurement determined inStep 1. Loosely tighten the rear mounting bracket adjustment screws shown inFigure 2-10. Final adjustment will be made once the slide rails are installedinto the system rack.

3. Align one of the slide rail assemblies behind the mounting holes in the verticalmounting rail (see Figure 2-13) located on the front left side of the rackcabinet. The tabs on the front and rear of the slide rail assembly help to align itwith the holes in the vertical mounting rail.

4. Install two screws and two washers to secure the front of the slide rail assemblyto the front vertical mounting rail and tighten loosely.

Figure 2 - 13 : Installing the Slide Rail Assembly (Front Side)

5. Carefully align the rear holes of the slide rail assembly with the holes in therear vertical mounting rail.

6. Install two screws (B) and two washers to secure the rear of the slide railassembly to the vertical mounting rail.

Figure 2 - 14 : Installing the Slide Rail Assembly (Rear Side)

7. Tighten all four screws holding the slide rail assembly to the vertical mountingrails.

8. Tighten the three screws securing the rear mounting bracket (see Figure 2-10).9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 for mounting the other slide rail assembly on the right

side of the rack cabinet.

2 - 17

Page 56: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Installing the Server in the Rack

WarningThe non-hot-swap system can weigh up to 35 kg. If the systemcontains numerous optional boards and peripheral devices, itwill weigh more. To avoid personal injury, make sure you haveat least three persons help you lift or move the system.

1. Extend the slide rails until they are locked in place.2. With three or more persons assisting you, lift the server and align the inner rails

attached to both sides of the server with the extended rails.3. Insert the inner rails into the extended slide rails and push the server into the

rack until it stops.4. Carefully press down the release levers on the inner rails to release the locks

and slide the server all the way into the rack.5. To check that the server slides in and out of the rack, grasp the two handles on

the front of the server and slowly pull the server out and push it back in.

1 Release lever

Figure 2 - 15 : Installing the Server in the Rack Cabinet

1

2 - 18

Page 57: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Cable Arm AssemblyThe quadruple hinged cable retention arm attaches to the rear of the server and thesystem rack allowing cables to move as the server slides back and forth within the rackcabinet. The server cables are tie-wrapped to the cable retention arm. The followingsections provide procedures for installing the cable retention arm assembly to yourserver and your system rack.

Installing the Cable Arm Assembly

1. Using two screws (D), mount the arm bracket onto the rear of the server:

Figure 2 - 16 : Installing the Arm Bracket

2. To attach the cable arm to the rack frame:■ When the distance between the front vertical mounting rail and the rear

vertical mounting rail is about 743 mm, align one end of the cable armwith the outside of the caged nuts installed to the rear of the rack frameand secure it with two screws (B).

Figure 2 - 17 : Attaching the Cable Arm to the Rack Frame

2 - 19

Page 58: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

■ When the distance between the front vertical mounting rail and the rearvertical mounting rail is from 700 mm to 742 mm, attach the cablearm (1) to the adapter bracket (2) to shorten the distance (3) as much aspossible:

Figure 2 - 18 : Installing the Adapter Bracket (1)

■ When the distance between the front vertical mounting rail and the rearvertical mounting rail is from 745 mm to 900 mm, attach the cablearm (1) to the adapter bracket (2) to shorten the distance (3) as much aspossible:

Figure 2 - 19 : Installing the Adapter Bracket (2)

21

3

2

1

3

2 - 20

Page 59: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

3. Align the small holes on the cable arm with those on the arm bracket installedin Step 1, then attach the cable arm to the arm bracket using two screws (D).

Figure 2 - 20 : Attaching the Cable Arm to the Arm Bracket

4. Press in on the rail release latches and slowly push the server in and out of therack several times.

5. Ensure proper movement of the cable arm.Note that this cable arm can be moved toward the rear of the rack cabinet toallow cable connection and replacement of the power supply unit.Check that no excess force is applied to the cable arm by pulling it toward you.Adjustment of the cable arm hinged brackets may be necessary to attainsmooth operation. Tighten all screws. Ensure the server can be fully closed andsecured to the rack.

Figure 2 - 21 : Adjusting the Cable Arm Assembly

1 Cable arm2 Arm bracket3 Small hole

1

2 3

2 - 21

Page 60: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Installing Cables

1. Plug all external cables into the server.2. Plug all power cords into the power outlet.3. Bundle all the server cables together and tie-wrap them to the cable arm.4. Check that no excess force is applied to the cables by pulling the server out of

the rack and pushing it back into the rack.

Figure 2 - 22 : Bundling and Tie-wrapping Server Cables

CautionServer cables must be bundled and tie-wrapped to preventthem from coming into contact with the slide rails and otherequipment installed in the rack cabinet.Form the cables with a slight slack between the cable arm andthe server. This is to prevent the cables from coming off whenthe server is pulled out from the rack and to avoid applying anypressure to the plug of the power cord.

2 - 22

Page 61: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Installing the Cable Arm Stopper

Using a screw (D), mount the cable arm stopper onto the cable arm.

1 Cable arm stopper 2 Cable arm

Figure 2 - 23 : Installing the Cable Arm Stopper

Securing the Server in the RackPush the server all the way into the rack and tighten the four captive thumbscrews tosecure it to the rack.

1 Front bezel 2 Captive thumbscrews

Figure 2 - 24 : Securing the Server

Removing the Server from the Rack1. Loosen the four captive thumbscrews on the front of the server (see Figure 2-

24).2. Grasp the two handles on the front of the server and slowly pull it out until the

sliding rails lock in place.

1

2

1

2

2 - 23

Page 62: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Using the SystemThe following subsections describe how to use this server system properly and safely,including an explanation of the server system power on/off sequences, what the POSTprogram checks in the server, and how to perform a forced power shutdown.

When using the server system the following precautions should be observed.

■ Make sure you power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cablesbetween the server and peripheral devices. Connecting or disconnecting the cableswhile the server is powered on may cause malfunction or failures within the server.

■ Verify that the access lamp on the diskette drive is unlit before turning off theserver or ejecting the floppy disk. Turning off the server or ejecting the floppy diskwhile the access lamp is lit may damage data being stored on the floppy disk.

■ After turning off the server, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.Cycling the power immediately may cause malfunction or failures of the server.

■ Before relocating the server, turn off the power and unplug the power cord fromthe outlet. Moving the server when it is powered may cause malfunction or failuresof the server.

■ Clean the server regularly. Regular cleaning prevents failures of the server and itscomponents.

■ Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, anuninterruptible power supply unit is recommended.

■ Only use options qualified for the server. A non-qualified option may be mountedor connected to the server, but it may fail to operate normally or even cause fail-ures. These types of failures are not covered under warranty.

2 - 24

Page 63: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Removing the Front DoorOpen the front door to power on/off the server, to access the floppy disk drive, CD-ROM drive, and 5.25-inch devices, and to install/remove hard disks to the 3.5-inchdevice bays.

To remove the front door:

1. Insert the provided security key into the key hole and turn the key to unlock thefront door (See the following figure).

2. Hold the front door edges and gently pull the door away from the serverchassis.

Figure 2 - 25 : Opening the Front Door

CautionDo not open the front door by hanging the handle at the upperleft corner with your claws. If the front door cannot be openedeasily, hold the upper left and lower left corners of the front doorwith your hands and then pull it out toward you.

Note: The standard CD-ROM drive and some options forthe 5 1/4-inch devices such as a CD-ROM drive have a functionto eject a tray or media using a software command. Beforeissuing a software command to eject a tray or media, confirmthat the front door is open. If the command is executed while thefront door is closed a tray or media may run into the front doorresulting in an error or may cause the unit to fail.

Installing the Front DoorWhen you close the front door, lock the door with the key for security.

A LockB Unlock

1 2

A B

2 - 25

Page 64: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Floppy Disk DriveYour server is provided with the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive on its front to write/readdata to/from a floppy disk.

Your server supports the following 3.5-inch floppy disks:

■ 2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)Stores data of 1.44 MB.

■ 2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)Store data of 720 KB.

Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before insertinga floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.

When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, the drive clicksand the eject button on the floppy disk is slightly pushed out.

Notes:

■ You cannot use a 1.2 MB-formatted floppy disk to boot theserver.

■ When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted, the messagenotifying that date read is not available and the messageprompting formatting are displayed. Refer to the manual thatcomes with the OS to format the floppy disk.

■ If the floppy disk contains a system, powering on or restart-ing the server with the floppy disk inserted boots the systemfrom the floppy disk.

To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, press the eject button.

Note: Make sure that the floppy disk access lamp is unlitbefore ejecting the floppy disk. Ejecting the disk when theaccess lamp is lit may destroy the disk data.

2 - 26

Page 65: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

CD-ROM DriveYour server is provided with the CD-ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD-ROM (read-only compact disk).

Note: Depending on your order, the DVD-RAM drive maybe installed at the factory.

Setting and Removing the CD-ROM

Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before insertinga CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Press the Open/Close button on the front of the CD-ROM drive to eject the tray. Withthe CD-ROM label facing up, place a CD-ROM in the tray gently and securely.

Figure 2 - 26 : Inserting the CD-ROMPress the Open/Close button or gently push on the tray front.The tray is retracted into the CD-ROM drive.

Figure 2 - 27 : Pushing the Tray

A Open/close button

A

2 - 27

Page 66: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

CautionIf the CD-ROM drive produces large noise after the setting of aCD-ROM, reload the CD-ROM.

To remove a CD-ROM, press the Open/Close button to eject the tray, as described forinserting it, and then take the CD-ROM out of the tray. (The orange-lit access lampindicates ongoing disk access. The Open/Close button does not work while the lamp islit.)

Your OS may have a command to eject the tray.

When you have taken out the CD-ROM, retract the tray back in place.

When you fail to eject

When you fail to eject the CD-ROM tray with the Open/Close button and take out theCD-ROM from the server:

1. Press the POWER switch to power off the server.The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.

2. Insert a metal pin of approximately 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length(a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the emergency holeon the right front of the CD-ROM drive and gently push it in until the tray isejected.

Caution■ Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break.

■ If the above procedure does not let you take out the CD-ROM, contact your sales agent.

3. Hold the tray and pull it out.4. Take out the CD-ROM.5. Push the tray back into position.

2 - 28

Page 67: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Making ConnectionsConnect your keyboard, monitor, and mouse. Also connect any external peripheraldevices such as a printer or scanner by following the instructions included with thesedevices.

Caution■ Power off the server and a peripheral device before connec-

tion. Connecting a powered peripheral device to the pow-ered server will cause malfunctions and failures.

■ Inserting a telephone line connector into a LAN RJ-45 portmay result in personal injury and equipment damage

■ To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cableto the server, consult with your sales agent for availability ofsuch a device or cable. Some third-party devices may not beused for the server.

■ The cable length of SCSI device connections is up to 3 m.

■ To use the external SCSI port, see “Internal Cabling” onpage 4-65 for changing the internal cable connection.

■ Make sure that no SCSI IDs for external SCSI devices andinternal devices conflict.

■ To connect the provided keyboard and mouse, plug theirconnectors to the server with the "∆" mark on the connectorsfacing right.

2 - 29

Page 68: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

.

Figure 2 - 28 : Connecting Peripheral Devices

2 - 30

Page 69: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Connecting the Power CordPlug the female end of the AC power cord into the input receptacle on the rear of thepower supply cage. Plug the male end of the power cord into NEMA 5-15R outlet for100-120 VAC, or CEE7, or UK outlet for 200-240 VAC.

If the power cord(s) supplied with the system is not compatible with the AC wall outletin your region, obtain a suitable power cord that meets the following criteria:

■ The power cord must be rated for the available AC voltage and have a currentrating that is at least 125 % of the current rating of the system.

■ The power cord connector that plugs into the wall outlet must be terminated in agrounding-type male plug designed for use in your region. It must havecertification marks showing certification by an agency acceptable in your region.

■ The power cord connector that plugs into the system must be an IEC- type CEE-22female connector.

■ The power cord must be less than 1.8 meters (6.0 feet) long.

Warning■ Your system shipped with a power cord for the power supply.

Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cordif it is not the exact type required.

■ When connecting the power cord to a power control unitsuch as an UPS unit, check that the power control unit ispowered OFF. Connecting the power cord while power issupplied to the power control unit may cause a failure.

■ Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.

■ Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegalnumber of connections.

■ Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.

2 - 31

Page 70: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

To connect the power cord:

1. Plug the provided power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of theserver.

2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.

Figure 2 - 29 : Connecting the Power Cord

To connect the power cord from the server to an interruptive power supply (UPS), useservice outlets on the rear of the UPS.

The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups: SWITCH OUT and UN-SWITCH OUT. (They may be called "OUTPUT1" and "OUTPUT2".)

To control power supply with an application that controls the UPS, connect the powercord to an SWITCH OUT outlet.

For constant power supply, connect the power cord to a UN-SWITCH OUT outlet.(Connect the modem that is in service for 24 hours to this outlet.)

A UN-SWITCH OUT/Output 2 B SWITCH OUT/Output 1

Figure 2 - 30 : Uninterruptible Power Supply Outlets

When the power cord from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server tolink with power supply from the UPS.

To power on the server from the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply), select [Server] -[AC-LINK] - [Power On].

Change a parameter for "AC Link" under the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility.See Chapter 3 for details.

A B

2 - 32

Page 71: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Powering On Your System1. Make sure all external devices, such as a video display, keyboard, and mouse

(optional) have been connected, and the power cords are connected.2. Power on the video display and any other external devices.

Note: If the server power cord(s) is connected to a powercontrol unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)make sure that the power control unit is powered on.

3. Open the front door (tower-based system only) and press the push-buttonpower on/off switch (1) on the front panel.The server power lamp (2) is lit.

1 Power switch 2 Power lamp

Figure 2 - 31 : Power Switch and Power Lamp

4. If the server power lamp is not lit, ensure the AC power cord is connected to afunctional AC power source.

After a few seconds your system begins the internal Power-On Self Tests (POST).POST checks the motherboard, CPU(s), memory, keyboard, mouse, and most installedperipheral devices. POST also displays the start messages of the BIOS setup utilityduring execution.

The POST check results should be checked in the following cases:

■ When the server is being used for the first time.

■ When the server appears to fail.

■ When the server beeps many times between power-on and OS start-up.

■ When an error message appears on the screen.

2

1

2 - 33

Page 72: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Note: For error messages that appear on the display unit,see ““Error Messages” on page 5-24.

CautionAlways allow POST to complete before powering down yourserver.

If you have problems powering on your server, refer to ““Problem Solving” on page 5-1”.

After you have powered on your server, insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM intothe CD-ROM drive, reboot the system and follow the screen prompts to runEXPRESSBUILDER.

After you have successfully powered on your system, refer to “Installing the OperatingSystem with Express Setup” on page D-1.

Caution■ If the power cord is connected to the server, an initial diagno-

sis of the hardware starts. The POWER switch does notwork while in diagnosis. Wait for about 10 seconds, thenpress the POWER switch.

■ Always allow POST to complete before powering down yourserver (see the next subsection for POST).

Powering Off Your SystemWhen server system power is on, pressing the power on/off switch on the front panel ofthe server turns the power off.

To power off your system:

1. Shutdown the operating system (OS).2. Press the power on/off switch on the front panel of the server.

The power lamp goes out.3. Power off the peripheral devices.

2 - 34

Page 73: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

Note: If the server power cord is connected to a powercontrol unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply),refer to the UPS user's guide for proper power-off procedures.

Forcing a Power ShutdownA forced power shutdown can be used when the power on/off switch does not poweroff the server or the reset functions do not work.

To force a power shutdown, press in on the power on/off switch located on the frontpanel of the server for at least 4 seconds.

To power on after a forced shutdown, wait 10 seconds and then power on again.

2 - 35

Page 74: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Setting Up Your System

2 - 36

Page 75: Nec 120 Lh User guide

3Configuring Your System

■ Configuring Your System

■ BIOS Setup Utility

■ SCSISelect Utility

■ RAID Configuration Utility

■ Configuring MotherBoard Jumpers

Page 76: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

3 - 2

Configuring Your SystemConfiguration and setup utilities are used to change your system configuration. You canconfigure your system, as well as option boards you may add to your system, using theBIOS Setup Utility. Several unique system parameters are configured using the BIOSSetup, which is stored in the system FLASH memory.

The Adaptec Configuration Utility detects the SCSI host adapters on the system board.Use this utility if you need to configure the two SCSI controllers in your system, toconfigure the hard disk drives connected to a SCSI controller as a RAID drive, or toperform a SCSI disk format or verify disk operation on the SCSI disk drives. TheAdaptec Configuration Utility is also used to configure any SCSI removable mediadevices installed in your system.

If your system has been factory configured, the BIOS Setup or Adaptec ConfigurationUtility do not need to be run unless you want to change the password or security fea-tures, add certain types of option boards or devices, or upgrade your system board.

This chapter also provides information on several system configuration parameters thatare set by jumpers on the system board. However, these parameters do not usuallyrequire change.

Page 77: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

BIOS Setup UtilityThe SETUP utility is used to change system configuration parameters. This utility ispre-installed in the flash memory and does not require a diskette or an operating systempresent to run.

The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility andshipped in the best conditions. Thus, you don't need to use the SETUP utility in mostcases. However, you might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below.

Caution■ The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use

only.

■ The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The serveris provided with two levels of password: Supervisor andUser. With the Supervisor password, you can view andchange all system parameters of the SETUP utility. With theUser password, system parameters available for viewingand changing are limited.

■ Do not set any password before installing the OS.

■ The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility.Dialog boxes appear on your SETUP utility, thus, may differfrom descriptions in this manual. If you find anything unclear,see the online help or ask your sales agent.

■ Use the Exit menu when exiting the SETUP utility. Exitingthe utility with the POWER switch or reset operation makesthe system lose the stored parameters.

Starting SETUP UtilityPowering on the server starts POST (Power On Self-Test) and displays its checkresults. If the splash screen is displayed, press Esc.

After a few seconds, the following message appears at bottom left on the screen: “PressF2 to enter SETUP”.

Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.

If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entryscreen appears. Enter the password.

Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the passwordcorrectly for three consecutive times, the server halts (you can no longer proceed).Power off the server.

3 - 3

Page 78: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Use the arrow keys to select a menu or an item on a displayed menu. Press the valuekeys (listed in the table below) to cycle through the allowable values for the selectedfield. Use the Exit menu’s “Save Values” selection to save the current values on all themenus.

To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu and pressENTER. An arrow precedes selections with submenus.

Refer to the following table for information on the keys that you use with BIOS Setup.These keys are also listed at the bottom of the Setup menu.

BIOS Setup Configuration SettingsThe BIOS Setup Configuration tables show the default settings for the BIOS SetupUtility and provide a place for you to record any changes you make to these settings.Recommended values are bold in the following tables.

Table 3 - 1: Main MenuMenu UseMain Use this menu for basic system configuration.Advanced Use this menu for setting the Advanced Features available on

your system.Security Use this menu to set User and Supervisor Passwords and

configure the secure mode.Server Use this menu for configuring unique Server features.

Boot Use this menu to configure Boot Device priority.

Exit Exits the current menu.

Table 3 - 2: BIOS Setup KeysKey Function in Setup MenuESC Exit the current menu and return to the previous menu.Left or right arrow keys Move between menus.Up or down arrow keys Move cursor up and down. The cursor moves only to the settings

that you can change.F9 Load default configuration values for this menu.F10 Save configuration values and exit.ENTER Execute command or Select ✟ submenu.

3 - 4

Page 79: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Main Menu

Primary and Secondary Master & Slave IDE & Serial ATA Channel 0 & 1 submenus

Correspondence between the menu items and devices:

■ Primary IDE Master: ATA hard disk drive 1 (not supported)

■ Primary IDE Slave: ATA hard disk drive 2 (not supported)

■ Secondary IDE Master: CD-ROM drive (standard)

■ Secondary IDE Slave: None

■ Serial ATA Channel 0 Master: Serial ATA hard disk drive 1 (option)

■ Serial ATA Channel 1 Master: Serial ATA hard disk drive 2 (option)

Table 3 - 3: Main MenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

System Time HH:MM:SS Set the System Time.System Date MM/DD/YYYY Set the System Date.Legacy Floppy A Disabled

360 KB 5¼”1.2 MB 5¼”720 KB 3½”1.44/1.25 Mb 3½”2.88 MB 3½”

Set the settings of floppy disk drive A (standard configuration).

Legacy Floppy B Disabled360 KB 5¼”1.2 MB 5¼”720 KB 3½”1.44/1.25 Mb 3½”2.88 MB 3½”

Set the settings of floppy disk drive B. No second floppy disk drive is included in this system.

Hard Disk Pre-Delay

Disabled3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 21, 30 Seconds

Allows slower spin-up drives to come ready.

Primary IDE Master Selects sub-menuPrimary IDE Slave Selects sub-menuSecondary IDE Master

Selects sub-menu

Secondary IDE Slave

Selects sub-menu

Serial ATA Channel 0 Master

Selects sub-menu

Serial ATA Channel 1 Master

Selects sub-menu

Processor Settings Selects sub-menuLanguage English (US)

ItalianoEspañolFrançaisDeutsch

Select the display language for the BIOS.

3 - 5

Page 80: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Processor Settings Submenu

Table 3 - 4: Primary and Secondary Master and Slave IDE Submenus Feature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

Type NoneUserAutoCD-ROM

Selects the type of device attached to the IDE or serial ATA channel. It is strongly recommended to keep the factory setting [Auto].

The following options do not appear when None or Auto are selected for Type.Multi-Sector Transfer

Disabled2 Sectors4 Sectors8 Sectors16 Sectors

Specifies the number of sectors that are transferred per block during multiple sector transfers.

LBA Mode Control EnabledDisabled

LBA stands for "logical block addressing". Enable/disable LBA instead of cylinder, head, sector, addressing.

Transfer Mode StandardFast PIO 1Fast PIO 2Fast PIO 3Fast PIO 4FPIO 3/DMA1FPIO 4/DMA2

Select the method for moving data to/from the drive.

Ultra DMA DisabledMode 0Mode 1Mode 2Mode 3Mode 4Mode 5

Select the Ultra DMA mode used for moving data to/from the drive.

Table 3 - 5: Processor Settings Submenu Feature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

Processor Retest YesNo

If Yes is selected, the BIOS will clear historical processor status and retest the processor on next boot.

Processor Speed Display only Displays the processor speed detected by the BIOS

Processor 1 CPUID Display only Displays the processor CPU ID detected by the BIOS. "Disabled" indicates that the processor is defected.

Processor 1 L2 Cache

Display only Displays the processor level 2 cache detected by the BIOS

Processor 2 CPUID Display only Displays the processor CPU ID detected by the BIOS. "Disabled" indicates that the processor is defected.

3 - 6

Page 81: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Note: The BIOS may display more options that presentedhere.

Processor 2 L2 Cache

Display only Displays the processor level 2 cache detected by the BIOS

Hyper-Threading Technology

EnabledDisabled

Enables or disables the Hyper-Threading technology.See note below.

Table 3 - 5: Processor Settings Submenu (Continued)Feature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

3 - 7

Page 82: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Advanced Menu

Memory Configuration Submenu

Table 3 - 6: Advanced MenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

Memory Configuration

Select submenu

PCI Configuration Select submenuPeripheral Configuration

Select submenu

Advanced Chipset Control

Select submenu

Boot-time Diagnostic Screen

EnabledDisabled

If enabled, the BIOS will display the splashy screen during POST. Press Esc to switch to the POST execution screen.

Reset Configuration Data

NoYes

Select Yes if you want to clear the Extended System Configuration Data (ESCD) area.

NumLock AutoOffOn

Sets power on NumLock state.

Memory/Processor Error

BootHalt

If Boot is selected, the system will attempt to boot after a memory or processor error. If Halt is selected, the boot is stopped when POST error occurs.

Table 3 - 7: Memory Configuration SubmenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

System Memory Display only Indicates the total capacity of the basic memory

Extended Memory Display only Indicates the total capacity of the extended memory.

DIMM Group #1-4 Status

NormalNot installed Disabled

Displays the current status of the memory group. Disabled indicates that a DIMM in the bank has failed and the entire group has been disabled.

Memory Retest NoYes

Causes BIOS to retest all memory on the next boot.

Extended RAM Step 1MB1KBEvery locationDisabled

"1MB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1MB. "1KB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1KB. "Every location" tests every memory location. "Disabled" indicates that only memory initialization is done

Online Spare Memory

DisabledEnabled

Disables or enables online spare memory feature.

3 - 8

Page 83: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

PCI Configuration Submenu

Embedded SCSI Submenu

Embedded NIC (Dual Gbit) Submenu

Table 3 - 8: PCI Configuration SubmenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

Embedded SCSI Select submenu

Embedded NIC (Dual Gbit)

Select submenu

Embedded Video Controller

Select submenu

PCI Slot 1-6 Option ROM

EnabledDisabled

Initialize device expansion ROM

Table 3 - 9: Embedded SCSI SubmenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

SCSI Controller EnabledDisabled

Enables or disables the onboard SCSI controllers.

Option ROM Scan EnabledDisabled

Enables or disables the onboard VGA controller.

Table 3 - 10: Embedded NIC (Dual Gbit) SubmenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

LAN Controller DisabledEnabled

If Disabled, the BIOS will hold the embedded chip in reset. In this configuration, the controller hardware is completely disabled, and will be invisible to the PnP operating systems.

Option ROM Scan EnabledDisabled

If Enabled, initialize device expansion ROM.

3 - 9

Page 84: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Embedded Video Controller Submenu

Peripheral Configuration Submenu

CautionNote that the interrupt and/or base I/O address are not over-lapped with others. If the value set for the interrupt or base I/Oaddress is used in another resource, the yellow asterisk (*)appears. Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly.

Table 3 - 11: Embedded Video Controller SubmenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

Onboard VGA Control

DisabledEnabled

If Disabled, the BIOS will hold the embedded chip in reset. In this configuration, the controller hardware is completely disabled, and will be invisible to the PnP operating systems.

PCI Slot 1 Option ROM – PCI Slot 6 Option ROM

EnabledDisabled

Enable option ROM scan of the selected device.When the graphics accelerator board is installed or the disk array controller or SCSI controller boards to be installed are connected to the hard disk in which OS is installed, set this item to "Enabled". When the LAN controller board with installation of the option ROM BIOS is used but the board does not provide network booting, set this item to "Disabled.

Table 3 - 12: Peripheral Configuration Submenu Feature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

Serial Port A DisabledEnabledAuto

Enables or disables the serial port A

Base I/O address 3F82F83E82E8

Set the base I/O address for serial port A

Interrupt IRQ3IRQ4

Set the interrupt for serial port A

Serial port B DisabledEnabledAuto

Only if serial port B present, grayed otherwise.Same as serial port A

3 - 10

Page 85: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Advanced Chipset Control Submenu

Base I/O address 3F82F83E82E8

Set the base I/O address for serial port B

Interrupt IRQ3IRQ4

Set the interrupt for serial port B

Parallel port DisabledEnabledAuto

Enables or disables the parallel Port.

Base I/O address 378278

Set the base I/O address for the parallel port.

Interrupt IRQ 5IRQ 7

Set the interrupt for the parallel port.

Mode Output onlyBi-directionalEPPECP

Set the mode for the parallel port.

DMA channel DMA 1DMA 3

Set the DMA channel for the parallel port

PS/2 Mouse DisabledEnabledAuto Detect

Enables or disables the PS/2 mouse.

USB Host Controller DisabledEnabled

If disabled, the USB ports do not accept the USB device class 3 (HID: Human Interface Device).

Legacy USB Support

DisabledEnabled

Enables or disables support for legacy USB.

Parallel ATA DisabledChannel 0Channel 1Enabled

Selects parallel ATA is enabled or disabled.

Serial ATA DisabledEnabled

Enables or disables Serial ATA.

Table 3 - 13: Advanced Chipset Control SubmenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

Enable Multimedia Timer

NoYes

Specify whether the system supports the multimedia timer feature.

Wake On LAN/PME DisabledEnabled

Specify whether the remote power-on function through embedded NIC, PCI devices in slots 1 to 5 is enabled or disabled.

Table 3 - 12: Peripheral Configuration Submenu (Continued)Feature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

3 - 11

Page 86: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Wake On Ring DisabledEnabled

Specify whether the remote power-on function through a serial port is enabled or disabled.

Wake On RTC Alarm

DisabledEnabled

Specify whether the remote power-on function by using RTC alarm feature is enabled or disabled.

Table 3 - 13: Advanced Chipset Control Submenu (Continued)Feature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

3 - 12

Page 87: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Security Menu

Note: User password can be set only when Administratorpassword is already set.

CautionSet the passwords only after OS is installed.

Table 3 - 14: Security MenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

User Password is ClearSet

Indicates whether the user password is set (view only). Once set, this can be disabled by setting it to a null string, or by clearing password jumper on system board (see Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in this Chapter).

Supervisor Password is

ClearSet

Indicates whether the supervisor password is set (display only). Once set, this can be disabled by setting it to a null string, or by clearing password jumper on system board (see Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in this Chapter).

Set User Password Up to 7 alphanumeric characters

Supervisor password controls access to the setup utility.When Enter is pressed, the user is prompted for a password; press Esc to abort. Once set, this can be disabled by setting it to a null string, or by clearing password jumper on system board (refer to Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in this chapter).

Set Supervisor Password

Up to 7 alphanumeric characters

When the <Enter> key is pressed, the user is prompted for a password; press ESC key to abort. Once set, this can be disabled by setting it to a null string, or by clearing password jumper on system board (refer to Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in thischapter).

Password On Boot DisabledEnabled

Disables or enables password entry on boot.

3 - 13

Page 88: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Fixed Disk Boot Sector

NormalWrite Protect

Will write protect the boot sector of the hard drive to prevent viruses from corrupting the drive under DOS if set to write protect.

Secure Mode Timer Disabled1 min2 min5 min10 min20 min1 hr.2 hr.

Set the period from no input from the keyboard or mouse to the point at which the system enters into the secure mode.

Hot KeyCTRL+ALT+

LZ

Specify the hot key to invoke secure mode features. Pressing the assigned key along with Ctrl and Alt invoke secure mode. This option is enabled when User Password is set.

Secure Mode Boot DisabledEnabled

Specify whether the system boots in secure mode. This option is enabled when User Password is set.

Video Blanking DisabledEnabled

Specify whether to turn off the monitor when secure mode is activated.

Floppy Write Protect DisabledEnabled

Controls access to the floppy disk drive during the secure mode.

Power Switch Inhibit

DisabledEnabled

Enables or disables the POWER switch. If "Enabled" is selected, power-off with the POWER switch becomes unavailable after OS boot-up. (Forced shut down also becomes unavailable. Forced shut down is a feature to shut down by pressing the POWER switch for at least four seconds.)

Table 3 - 14: Security Menu (Continued)Feature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

3 - 14

Page 89: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Server Menu

CautionTo power on the server from the UPS (Uninterruptible PowerSupply), select [Server] - [AC Link] - [Power On].

The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off onceand then on again, depending on the setting of "AC LINK."

Note: Pressing the power switch continuously for fourseconds or longer forces the power off.

Table 3 - 15: Server MenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

System Management

Select Submenu

Console Redirection Select SubmenuAssert NMI on PERR

DisabledEnabled

Indicates whether PCI PERR is supported or not.

Assert NMI on SERR

DisabledEnabled

Indicates whether PCI SERR is supported or not.

POST Error Pause DisabledEnabled

Indicates whether POST is aborted once at the end of POST if an error occurs during the execution of POST.

AC-LINK Stays OffLast StatePower On

Indicates the AC LINK function. Shows the state of the power of the server.

Table 3 - 16: AC LINK settings

System status before AC power offSetting of AC LINKStay Off Last State Power On

Operating Off On On

Aborting (DC power being off also) Off Off On

Forced shutdown Off Off On

3 - 15

Page 90: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

System Management Submenu

* Displayed only when an optional remote management card is installed in your system.

Table 3 - 17: System Management SubmenuFeature Choices or

Display OnlyDescription Your Setting

BIOS Version e.g. 1N42Display only

Indicates BIOS version number.

Board Part Number e.g.856-124028-001Display only

Indicates the part number of mother board.

Board Serial Number

Display only Indicates the serial number of mother board.

System Part Number

e.g. [N8100-942E]Display only

Indicates the system part number.

System Serial Number

Display only Indicates the serial number of system.

Chassis Part Number

e.g. 856-060342-121Display only

Indicates the part number of chassis.

Chassis Serial Number

e.g. 04Display only

Indicates the serial number of chassis.

IPMI Specification Version *

Display only Displays IPMI specification version.

BMC Device ID * Display only Displays BMC device ID.

BMC Device Version *

Display only Displays BMC device version.

BMC Firmware Version *

Display only Displays BMC firmware version.

PIA Version * Display only Displays version of the platform information area.

SDR Revision * Display only Displays revision of the sensor data record.

3 - 16

Page 91: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Console Redirection SubmenuTable 3 - 18: Console Redirection Submenu

Feature Choices or Display Only

Description Your Setting

BIOS Redirection Port

DisabledSerial Port ASerial Port B

Specify the address/interrupt of the serial port to which a remote console is connected.

ACPI Redirection Port

DisabledSerial Port ASerial Port B

Specify the serial port to which an ACPI console is connected.

Baud Rate 960019.2K38.4K57.6K115.2K

Specify the baud rate used for the interface with successive remote consoles.

Flow Control NoneXON/XOFFCTS/RTSCTS/RTS + CD

Select a flow control method.

Console Type PC ANSIVT100+VT-UTF8

Specify the type of remote console.

3 - 17

Page 92: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

3 - 18

Boot Menu

CautionTo boot NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, leave the factory defaultboot order.

Table 3 - 19: Boot Menu Feature DescriptionCD-ROM Drive This shows the factory default boot order.

When booting, the server searches for devices in the order set in this menu. The server starts the software when finding the boot software.

Move the cursor to the desired device with the up or down arrow keys and change the priority with the <+> and <-> keys

+Removable Devices+ Hard DriveIBA GE Slot 0910 v1216IBA GE Slot 0918 v1216

Page 93: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

3 - 19

Exit MenuYou can make the following selections on the Exit Menu. Select an option using the upor down arrow keys, then press <Enter> to execute the option. Pressing <Esc> does notexit this menu. You must select one of the items from the menu or menu bar to exit.

Table 3 - 20: Exit Menu Choices DescriptionExit Saving Changes Exit after writing all modified Setup item values to NVRAM.

F10 key can be used for this operation.Exit Discarding Changes Exit leaving NVRAM unmodified. User is prompted if any of

the setup fields were modified.Esc key can be used for this operation.

Load Setup Defaults Load default values for all SETUP items.F5 key can be used for this operation.

Discard Changes Read previous values of all Setup items from NVRAM.Save Changes Save changes to NVRAM without exiting the Setup.

Page 94: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

SCSISelect UtilityThe SCSISelect Utility detects and configures the SCSI controller located on thesystem board or an optional SCSI controller board installed in your system. This utilitymay be started with a simple key operation while POST is in progress and requires nospecific start-up disk.

The SCSISelect Utility is used mainly to set the transfer rate of connected SCSI device.Use the SCSISelect Utility to:

■ Change default values

■ Check and/or change SCSI device settings that may conflict with those of otherdevices in the server.

Running the SCSISelect UtilityYou access the SCSISelect Utility when you turn on or reboot your system.

To run the utility, perform the following procedure:

1. Power-on or reboot the system. 2. When this message appears on the video monitor:

Press Ctrl-A to run SCSI Utility...

3. Press Ctrl+A to run this utility. The SCSI utility starts. When the AdaptecSCSI Utility detects more than one AIC-79xx host adapter, it displays aselection menu listing the slot number of each adapter. When the selectionmenu appears, select the channel you wish to configure as follows:

* Internal SCSI connector

4. Select the channel and press enter, the following screen is displayed:

CautionThis system does not support “Enable HostRAID Support”. Do not change factory-set default. If changed, the system willnot start.

Table 3 - 21: SCSISelect Utility Channel SelectionBus: Device: Channel Selected SCSI Adapter04: 07: A* AIC-7902

Table 3 - 22: SCSISelect Utility Selection Menu Menu DescriptionConfigure/View Controller Settings Configure host adapter and device settings.SCSI Disk Utilities The utility scans the SCSI bus for SCSI devices,

reports a description of each device. Run these utilities before configuring SCSI devices.

Enable Host RAID Support Not supported

3 - 20

Page 95: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

5. If you wish to format a disk, verify disk media, or display a list of devices andtheir SCSI IDs, select “SCSI Disk Utilities”. If you wish to configure theadapter or a device, select “Configure/View Controller Settings”.

Adaptec SCSI Utility Configuration SettingsThe following keys are active for all Adaptec SCSI Utility screens:

The following table shows the normal settings for the Adaptec SCSI Utility andprovides a place for you to record any changes you make to these settings.

Table 3 - 23: Active Keys Key ActionArrows Up and down arrows move from one parameter to another within a

screen.ENTER Displays options for a configurable parameter. Selects an option.ESC Moves back to previous screen or parameter or EXIT if at the Main

menu.F6 Resets to host adapter defaults.

Table 3 - 24: SCSISelect Utility Setup ConfigurationsOPTION RECOMMENDED SETTING OR

DISPLAY ONLYYOUR CONFIGURATION

SCSI Controller ID 7SCSI Controller Parity EnabledSCSI Controller Termination EnabledAdditional OptionsBoot Device Configuration Press ENTER for menuMaster SCSI Controller AIC-7902 ABoot SCSI Controller AIC-7902 ASCSI Device Configuration Press ENTER for menuSync Transfer Rate (MB/Sec) 320Packetized YesQAS YesInitiate Wide Negotiation YesEnable Disconnection YesSend Start Unit Command YesBIOS Multiple LUN Support NoInclude in BIOS Scan YesAdvanced Configuration Press ENTER for menu.Reset SCSI Bus at IC Initialization

Enabled

Display <Ctrl-A> Messages During BIOS Initialization

Enabled

Extended Int13 Translation for DOSDrives >1 GByte

Enabled

POST Display Mode VerboseSCSI Controller Int13 Support EnabledDomain Validation Enabled

3 - 21

Page 96: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

SCSI Disk UtilitiesThis utility scans the SCSI bus for SCSI devices, reports a description of each device.Run these utilities before configuring SCSI devices.

To enter the utility, select "SCSI Disk Utilities" on the Options menu.

The SCSI ID scan begins displaying the message as shown below.

When the SCSI ID scan completes, the screen listing SCSI IDs and associated devicesappears.

Find out the SCSI ID for installed options on this screen. You can also view the deviceinformation by selecting a device and pressing Enter.

The following sub menu appears.

The following table lists submenu items and descriptions.:

Support Removable Disks Under Int13 as Fixed Disks

Disabled

BIOS Support for Bootable CDROM

Enabled

SCSI ID#4: xxxxxxxxxFirmware: xxxx xxxCapacity: xxGB

FormatVerify Disk Me-dia

Table 3 - 25: Submenu ItemsSubmenu item DescriptionFormat Formats the selected device.Verify Disk Media Verifies all the sectors in the selected device. If one or more bad

sectors are found, the sectors are remapped.

Table 3 - 24: SCSISelect Utility Setup Configurations (Continued)OPTION RECOMMENDED SETTING OR

DISPLAY ONLYYOUR CONFIGURATION

Scanning SCSI ID : 0 LUN Number : 0

3 - 22

Page 97: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

HostRAIDMove the cursor to “HostRAID” and press Enter to choose the HostRAID option.

Note. For detailed explanations about the HostRAIDfeature, see SCSISelect Utility User’s manual and AdaptecStorage Manager - Browser Edition User’s Guide. You mayview or print both of them from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDERCD-ROM.

Exiting Adaptec SCSI UtilityTo exit the Adaptec SCSI Utility, press ESC until a message prompts you to exit (if youchanged any settings, you are prompted to save the changes before you exit).

Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional BoardTo configure SCSI devices connected to an optional SCSI controller board, use theSCSI BIOS utility provided with the optional SCSI controller board.

Refer to the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller board or located inthe Documentation library section of the NEC Express Builder for details.

When the server has multiple SCSI controller boards installed, the server first displaysthe start-up message of the SCSISelect utility for the SCSI controller on the motherboard. It then displays the utility start-up message for additional SCSI controllers oneby one. The start-up message appears for the SCSI controller board in the onboardSCSI first, the PCI #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, and finally #6. The message displayed may varydepending on the optional SCSI controller board. Refer to the manual that comes withthe optional SCSI controller board for details.

Table 3 - 26: HostRAID Submenu ItemsSubmenu item Parameter DescriptionHostRAID Enabled

DisabledSelect “Disabled” if the onboard HostRAID controller is not used.

3 - 23

Page 98: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

3 - 24

RAID Configuration UtilityRAID (Redundant Array of Independent Devices) options are available for yoursystem, providing added security and high availability.

If you order a system with a RAID controller, the system is pre-configured at thefactory according to the table below.

If you want to change the RAID level or add additional hard disks to the array, use theRAID configuration utility. The RAID configuration utility is included with the RAIDcontroller.

If you are adding the RAID controller to an existing system, the RAID configurationutility allows you to configure your disk array before reinstalling your networkoperating system. The RAID controllers support various versions of RAID technology(referred to as RAID levels). To use any RAID level, you must configure the RAIDcontroller using the RAID configuration utility prior to installing your NetworkOperating System. For an explanation of this utility, refer to the documentation thatwas shipped with the RAID controller. It describes RAID technology and provides tipson making your array perform well in your specific application. It also covers arrayhardware preparation, configuration, and initialization. After completing the steps inthe manual, you can install your Network Operating System.

If you want to remotely configure the array (from a PC client), increase array capacityonline, or monitor statistics on disk and controller activity, you must install the arraymanager provided with your RAID subsystem. Increasing array capacity is covered inthe user's guide shipped with the option.

Table 3 - 27: RAID Configurations

Number of Hard Drives

RAID Level Configured

Hard Drives in Array

Description

1 7 1 JBOD (RAID 7) Known as Just a Bunch of Drives, JBOD allows the controller to access the drives independently. This configuration has no redundancy and does not use striping.

2 1 2 Mirroring (RAID 1) Drives are paired and mirrored. All data is 100% duplicated on an equivalent drive (fully redundant).

3 5 3 Striping with Parity (RAID 5) Data is striped across several physical drives. Parity protection is used for data redundancy.

4 or more 5 4 (one standby drive)

Striping with Parity (RAID 5) with a standby drive The array consists of three ON-LINE drives and one STANDBY drive. The standby replacement drive, or hot spare, is one of the most important features RAID provides to achieve automatic, non-stop service with a high degree of fault-tolerance.

Page 99: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Configuring MotherBoard JumpersOnly a qualified technical person should perform the procedures in this section.

CautionElectrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the system board.Modify the system board only at an ESD workstation. Other-wise, wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground.The system board jumpers enable you to set specific operatingparameters for your system. A jumper is a small plastic-encased conductor (shorting plug) that slips over two jumperpins.

With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the datastored in the server against access from unauthorized users. When you forget thepasswords, however, you may want clear them. The following describes how to clearthese passwords. You can also use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data inthe server.

Note:

■ Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configura-tion data.

■ After clearing CMOS, you must run the BIOS SETUP utilityand execute the following menus to reconfigure your motherboard.– Load Setup Defaults in the Exit menu– Memory Retest of Memory Configuration in the Advancedmenu– Processor Retest of Processor Settings in the Main menu

To clear passwords or the CMOS data, use the jumper switch on the mother board ofthe server. The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location.

CautionDo not change any other switch settings.Any change may cause the server to fail or malfunction.

3 - 25

Page 100: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

Figure 3 - 1 : Motherboard Jumpers Location

Moving System Board Jumpers

WarningBefore doing the procedures in this section, make sure that yoursystem is powered off and unplug the AC power cords from theback of the chassis. Failure to disconnect power before movingthe jumpers can result in personal injury and equipment dam-age.Observe static precautions. Use an antistatic wrist strap.

Clearing and Changing the Passwords

1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” as described in Chapter4 of this guide to prepare.

3 - 26

Page 101: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

2. Remove the right side door. See “Removing and Installing the Right SideDoor” on page 4 - 4.

3. Locate the position of the jumpers on the system board you are changing. See“Figure 3-1 Motherboard Jumpers Location” on page page 3-26. To change ajumper setting, use a pair of needle-nose pliers or your fingers to remove thejumper from its current location. Position the jumper over the two pins for thedesired setting and press it onto the pins. Be careful not to bend the pins.

4. To clear the BIOS password, remove the jumper strap on the BIOS passwordclear jumper.

5. Connect the power cord(s), power on the system and while waiting for POSTto complete, press the F2 key to enter BIOS setup. This automatically clears allpasswords, provided you exit and save the BIOS setup.

6. Power off the system and remove the power cord(s).7. Move the Clear Password jumper to its default position.8. Replace the right side door, connect the power cord(s) and power on the

system.9. To specify a new password run the BIOS Setup Utility as described earlier in

this chapter

Clearing CMOS

1. See the section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” as described in Chapter4 of this guide to prepare.

2. Remove the right side door. See “Removing and Installing the Right SideDoor” on page 4 - 4.

3. Locate the position of the jumpers on the system board you are changing. See“Figure 3-1 Motherboard Jumpers Location” on page page 3-26. To change ajumper setting, use a pair of needle-nose pliers or your fingers to remove thejumper from its current location. Position the jumper over the two pins for thedesired setting and press it onto the pins. Be careful not to bend the pins.

4. For Clearing the CMOS, move the jumper strap to the CMOS clear position.5. Refer to the previous illustration to find the location of the jumper.6. Wait for a while (about 5 seconds), and then reinstall the jumper block to the

default position.7. Reinstall the right side door removed in Step 2.8. Plug the power cord to your server and turn on the server.9. Press F2 at the prompt to run the BIOS SETUP utility, and select "Load Setup

Defaults" at the Exit menu.

3 - 27

Page 102: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Configuring Your System

3 - 28

Page 103: Nec 120 Lh User guide

4Upgrading Your System

■ General Information

■ Static Precautions

■ Equipment Log

■ Tools Recommended for Upgrading Your System

■ Preparing Your System for Upgrade

■ Removing and Installing the Right Side Door

■ Removing or Installing the Processor Air Duct

■ Installing and Swapping a Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-Swap Disk Drive Bay

■ Installing and Replacing a Power Supply Unit

■ Installing and Removing a Cooling Fan Unit

■ Removing and Installing a Hot-Swap Fan

■ Installing and Removing 5.25-inch Devices

■ Installing or Removing a PCI Board

■ Installing or Removing a RAID Controller Board

■ Installing and Removing a Microprocessor

■ Installing or Removing DIMM

■ Installing a Remote Management Card

■ Replacing the Battery

■ Internal Cabling

Page 104: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

General Information

WarningThe DC push-button on/off switch on the front panel does notturn off completely the system AC power. Also, +5vdc is presenton the system board whenever the AC power cord is connectedbetween the system and an AC outlet. Before doing the proce-dures in this manual, make sure that your system is powered offand unplug the AC power cord from the back of the chassis.Failure to disconnect power before opening your system canresult in personal injury and equipment damage.

CautionOperating your system with the right side door removed candamage your system components. For proper cooling and airflow, always replace the right sidedoor before powering on your system.

WarningAvoid burns. If the system has been running, any installed pro-cessor and heat sink on the processor board(s) will be hot. To avoid the possibility of a burn, be careful when removing orinstalling components that are located near processors.

Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved optional peripheraldevices.

Static PrecautionsAn electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and othercomponents. You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strapattached to chassis ground when handling system components.

Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, keepthem in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system.

4 - 2

Page 105: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Equipment LogUse the equipment log form located at the end of this guide to record the model andserial number of your system, all installed options, and any other pertinent informationspecific to your system. You will need this information when configuring your system.

Tools Recommendedfor Upgrading Your System

Depending on the upgrade, you will need one or more of the following tools:

■ Phillips screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)

■ Flat-head screwdriver

■ Small needle nose pliers

■ Pen or pencil

■ ESD workstation or antistatic wrist strap (recommended)

Preparing Your System for UpgradeTo prepare your system for installation or removal of system component:

1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions listed under General Information andStatic Precautions at the beginning of this chapter.

2. Shutdown the operating system (OS).3. If necessary, press the power on/off switch on the front panel of the server (see

See “Powering On Your System” on page 33.). The power-on LED goes out.4. Power off the peripheral devices.5. Unplug the system power cord(s) from the AC wall outlet(s).

Note: If the system power cord is connected to a powercontrol unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply),refer to the UPS user's guide for proper power-off procedures.

6. Unplug all the I/O cables connected to the rear panel of your system.

4 - 3

Page 106: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing and Installing the Right Side Door

Removing the Right Side DoorTo install options in your system, you must remove the right side door of the system (asviewed from the rear).The left panel of the system (as viewed from the rear) does not have to be removed.

CautionFor proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the system withthe right side door removed. Always replace the right side door before powering on thesystem.

WarningIf you are removing the right side door after the system is setup, you must first power off the system and all external devicesand then unplug the system power cord(s).

4 - 4

Page 107: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

To remove the right side door:

1. Prepare your system for upgrade. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” onpage 4-3.

2. Remove the two thumbscrews (A in the figure below) securing the right sidedoor to the chassis.

3. Slide the right side door slightly towards the rear of the chassis.This unlocks the locking fingers behind the right side door.

4. Pull the right side door out and away from the chassis.

A Thumbscrews

Figure 4 - 1 : Removing the Right Side Door

Installing the Right Side Door1. Check that no tools or loose parts have been left inside the system chassis.2. Make sure that option boards are firmly seated in their respective slots and that

the interior cables are properly connected.3. Insert the locking fingers on top and bottom of the right side door into their

slots on the chassis.

Note: Ensure that the right side door is installed properlyand securely fastened. A cover sensor (intrusion switch)monitors the right side door.

4. Slide the right side door forward as far as it will go.

5. Secure the right side door thumbscrews in their holes.

Note: If your system is already set up, plug the system backin, reconnect the peripherals, and power on the peripherals andsystem.

A

4 - 5

Page 108: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing or Installing the Processor Air DuctTo install or remove the DIMM or processor, you will need to remove the air duct.

CautionDo not assemble the system without installing the air duct. Noduct installed in the system reduces cooling efficiency and canaffect performance or cause damage due to overheating.

Removing the Processor Air Duct1. Read “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4-3.2. Position the server unit on its left side (as viewed form the rear).3. Remove the right side door (see “Removing the Right Side Door” on page 4-4).4. Hold the left side of the air duct, and push the right end of the tab to release

from the chassis.5. Remove the duct from the chassis.

Figure 4 - 2 : Removing the Processor Air Duct

4 - 6

Page 109: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing the Processor Air Duct1. Holding the internal cables clear, place the air duct into the chassis.2. Adjust the air duct until the frame (A) of the right end of the duct is aligned

with the hook (B) on the chassis.

Figure 4 - 3 : Replacing the Processor Air Duct

3. Install the right side door (see “Installing the Right Side Door” on page 4-5).

A

B

4 - 7

Page 110: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing and Swappinga Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-Swap Disk Drive Bay

The 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay on the front of the server contains six slots on whichhard disks can be installed. The drive bay is not equipped with any hard disks(excluding when one or more built-in hard disks are ordered). Purchase the hard disksadditionally if required.

Caution■ Do not use any hard disks not approved by the server manu-

facturer. If an unapproved third party's hard disk is installedin the server, not only the hard disk but also the server itselfmay be defected.

■ For the disk array configuration, refer to the manual thatcomes with the disk array controller.

A hard disk having the thickness of 1 inch can be installed on each of the slots. TheSCSI IDs of the slots are fixed to ID0 to ID5 from bottom to top.

In the configuration at the shipment, the cable on the 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay isconnected to the Ultra320 SCSI (A) connector on the mother board.

To provide the disk array configuration, connect the cable on the 3.5-inch hard diskdrive bay to the disk array controller. The SCSI standard of the hard disk to be addedshould be the same as that of the existing disks.

Empty Hard drive trays are installed in the empty slots of the 3.5-inch hard disk drivebay. This is intended to improve the cooling effect within the server.Always keep an empty tray in any slot in which a hard disk is not installed.

4 - 8

Page 111: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

This section describes how to install a new hard disk drive or swapping out a faultydrive from one of the six hot-swap SCSI disk drive. The 3.5-inch SCSI disk drivesmust use the industry standard 80-pin single connector attachment (SCA) connector.Each drive must be installed in a carrier.

If installing new drives, follow an installation scheme starting with the bottom-mostdrive. Fill the bays bottom-to-top (1 through 6).

Figure 4 - 4 : Hot Swap Disk Drive Installation Scheme

Always install a disk carrier tray in an empty disk drive bay to maintain proper cooling.

If an individual SCSI drive activity/fault LED (amber light) is on steadily, this indicatesthat the drive has been flagged as faulty by the RAID host controller. Follow theprocedure described in this section to remove the faulty drive and swap in a good one.

Table 4 - 1: Hard disks SCSI address assignmentBay Hard Disk SCSI ID Address1 First Hard Disk (bottom) 02 Second Hard Disk 13 Third Hard Disk 24 Fourth Hard Disk 35 Fifth Hard Disk 46 Sixth Hard Disk (top) 5

1 2

#6

#5#4

#3#2

#1

4 - 9

Page 112: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Notes:

■ ESD can damage disk drives, boards, and other parts. Thissystem can withstand normal levels of environmental ESDwhile you are installing SCSI hard drives. However, we rec-ommend that you do all procedures in this chapter only at anESD workstation or provide some ESD protection by wear-ing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground - anyunpainted metal surface - on your system when handlingparts.

■ Swap SCSI drives without turning off power. This is oneof the few system procedures that is safe to do with the sys-tem power left on. This is true only if a Redundant Array ofIndependent Disks (RAID) controller module is installed andan appropriate RAID level; is chosen and only for the drive/carrier assemblies in the hot-swap bays, not for drives in anyother bays.

CautionDrive manufacturer's caution against moving a disk drive that isstill spinning because of possible damage to the drive.

4 - 10

Page 113: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing a Hard Disk Drive1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions listed under “General Information”

and “Static Precautions” on page 4-2.2. Prepare your system for upgrade. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on

page 4-3.3. To remove the disk carrier from the bay where you are installing the hard disk

drive:■ Press the lock on the top of the carrier handle inwards.

The disk carrier is released.

Figure 4 - 5 : Releasing the Disk Carrier

■ Pull the carrier handle towards you.

Figure 4 - 6 : Pulling the Carrier Handle

4 - 11

Page 114: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

■ Remove the carrier from the bay.

Figure 4 - 7 : Removing the Carrier from the Bay

CautionDo not insert your hand or any tool into the slot with the diskcarrier removed. Failure to follow this caution may cause anelectric shock or fire.

4. Remove the four screws that hold the air baffle to the carrier and remove the airbaffle.

Figure 4 - 8 : Removing the Air Baffle

A Air baffleB Screws (4)C Drive carrier

A

B

C

4 - 12

Page 115: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

5. Remove the device from its protective wrapper and place it on an antistaticsurface. Record the drive model and serial number in the equipment log.

CautionObserve static precautions. Use an antistatic wrist strap.

6. Set any drive jumpers or switches before you install the drive. See thedocumentation that comes with the device for jumper or switch information.

7. Place the drive into the disk carrier removed in steps 3 and 4 above. Orient thedrive so that its component side is down and its data connector is facing therear of the carrier. The connector should be flush with the rear of the carrier.See the following figure.

Note: If the drive comes with drive rails, do not use them.Remove any rails already attached.

8. Using the four screws removed earlier, attach the carrier to the drive.

Figure 4 - 9 : Installing a Hard Disk Drive into the Carrier

A Hard disk driveB Drive carrierC Positioning railD Screws (4)

A

B

C

D

4 - 13

Page 116: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

9. While holding the drive carrier align it so that it engages the guide rails in thedrive bay.

Figure 4 - 10 : Installing the Carrier into the Bay

10. Push the drive carrier into the bay until the locking tab on the bottom of itshandle engages in the bottom frame slot.

11. Push the carrier handle up until the handle clicks and locks in place.12. Close the front door, plug in the system power cord(s), and turn on the system.

4 - 14

Page 117: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Swapping a Hard Disk DriveWhen you are swapping out a faulty hard drive, you can determine which drive toremove by checking its SCSI drive activity/fault LED.

Note: When the SCSI drive activity/fault LED indicates adrive fault (steady amber light), you can remove the drive andswap in a replacement at any time without needing to powerdown the system and provided RAID is configured in thesystem. Drive manufacturer's caution against moving a drivethat is still spinning because of possible damage to the drive.Also, when the SCSI drive activity/fault LED indicates that thehard disk drive is being rebuilt (flashing amber light) do notremove the drive.

1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions listed under “General Information”and “Static Precautions” on page 4-2.

2. Open the front door of your server.3. To remove the disk carrier from the SCSI hard disk drive bay:

CautionDepending on the drive fault, the drive may be still spinningwhen you remove it. Follow the next steps exactly when remov-ing drives.

■ Press the disk carrier handle lock inward to release it.

Figure 4 - 11 : Releasing the Disk Carrie

4 - 15

Page 118: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

■ Grasp the disk carrier handle and pull the faulty disk drive out of the bayfar enough to disengage the drive connector from the backplane. Wait 30seconds until the drive spins down.

Figure 4 - 12 : Disengaging the Drive Connector

CautionDrive manufacturer's caution against moving a disk drive that isstill spinning because of possible damage to the drive.

■ Remove the carrier from the drive bay.

Figure 4 - 13 : Removing the Carrier from the Bay

4 - 16

Page 119: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

4. To install the replacement drive carrier with drive into the bay:■ Open the disk carrier handle lock.

■ While holding the drive carrier align it so that it engages the guide rails inthe drive bay.

■ Push the carrier handle up until the handle clicks and locks in place.

5. Close the front door on the system.6. If necessary, configure the system as described in Chapter 3 “Configuring Your

System” on page 3-1.

Auto Rebuild FunctionalityIf your server includes a disk array controller, the auto rebuild function can be used torestore data from the defective hard disk drive. The auto rebuild function can write thedata saved from a defective hard disk to the replacement disk drive thereby recoveringthe server to the state before the occurrence of the fault.

The auto rebuild function is valid for disk arrays set to RAID1 or RAID5.

The auto rebuild is automatically started only by the hot-swap of a defective hard disk(or disk replacement in the power-on state). During the auto rebuild, the disk lamp onthe hard disk is lit green or amber alternatively.

Caution■ Do not turn off the power of the server in the interval

between a fault of a hard disk to the end of the auto rebuildprocess.

■ Wait at least 90 seconds from the time you remove a defec-tive disk drive to the time you install the replacement diskdrive.

■ If a hard disk is rebuilding, do not replace another disk. (Thedisk lamp on the hard disk being rebuilt is lit green or amberalternatively.)

4 - 17

Page 120: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing and Replacing a Power Supply Unit

Note: The following procedures apply only to the hot-swappower supply model.

Your hot-swap power supply model contains one or two power supplies. The secondpower supply is optional and provides a redundant configuration that ensures continuedoperation of the system in the unlikely event one of the power supplies fails.

Installing a Power Supply Unit1. Read section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4-3.

CautionTurn off the power. Failure to do so causes the server to mal-function or fail.

2. Remove the screw securing the blank cover and remove the cover from thechassis.

Figure 4 - 14 : Removing the Blank Cover

4 - 18

Page 121: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

3. Slide the power supply into the vacant slot until it locks.

CautionThe power supply unit engaging its connector causes the resis-tance. To avoid damaging the power supply unit, do not tilt ortwist the unit as you push it into the connector.

Figure 4 - 15 : Installing a Power Supply Unit

4. Connect two power cords to the AC inlets. Use the standard power cordcoming with the server and the cord coming with the power supply.The Power lamp (green) blinks when the power cords are connected.

A Power lamp B Power failure lamp

Figure 4 - 16 : Connecting the Power Cords

5. Turn on the power of the server.The power lamps on the power supplies go on.

6. Make sure that any error on the power supply occurs with the status lamp andPOST.See “POST Error Messages ” on page 5-25 for details about the errormessages.

7. When the power lamp of the power supply is off, reinstall the power supply.8. If the power lamp is still off, contact your service representative.

A B

4 - 19

Page 122: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Replacing a Failing Power Supply UnitReplace only a failing power supply unit.

CautionDo not remove a power supply unit operating normally.

Note: When the server (or disk expansion unit) is equippedwith two power supplies and one of the power supplies operatesnormally (with the power lamp of the power supply being on),the other failing power supply can be replaced under the systemoperation (or in the power-on status). In this case, skip steps 2and 3 in the procedure below.

1. Locate the failing power supply unit by the AC POWER lamp on the rear ofeach power supply unit. The lamp of the failing power supply unit is amber.

2. Shutdown the server.3. To turn off the power, press the POWER switch.4. Disconnect the power cord from the failing power supply unit.5. While pressing down on the locking tab (1), hold the handle and carefully pull

the power supply out of the power supply bay (2).

Figure 4 - 17 : Removing the Power Supply form the Chassis

2

1

4 - 20

Page 123: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

CautionTo avoid damaging the power supply unit, do not tilt or twist theunit as you pull it from the power supply bay. The module disen-gaging from its connector causes the initial resistance you willfeel. Use even, steady force to remove the unit.

6. If operating the server without installing a replacement power supply unit,install the blank cover you removed in step 2 of power supply unit installationprocedure.

CautionTo maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the blankcover in the vacant slot of the power supply bay.

7. Install the new power supply unit. See “Installing a Power Supply Unit” onpage 4 - 18.

8. Check that the power supply unit is installed correctly.

4 - 21

Page 124: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing and Removing a Cooling Fan UnitYour server can include up to three cooling fans for cooling the CPU, memory, PCIdevices, and hard disk drives.

Installing a Cooling Fan Unit1. Read See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4 - 3.2. Remove the right side door.3. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the hot-swap SCSI hard disk drive bay.

Figure 4 - 18 : Disconnecting the SCSI Cable

4. Insert the cooling fan unit into the chassis.

Figure 4 - 19 : Inserting a Cooling Fan Unit

4 - 22

Page 125: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Notes:

■ Pass the cooling fan cables to the mother board connector(see the figure).

■ For easy installation, remove the hot-swap fan from the cool-ing fan unit during installation.

5. Insert the tabs (A) into the holes on the frame of the server and push thecooling fan unit toward the frame.The cooling fan unit is locked with locking tabs (B).

Figure 4 - 20 : Locking the Cooling Fan6. Connect the cooling fan cable to the motherboard. See “Motherboard” on

page 1-10.

B

A

4 - 23

Page 126: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing a Cooling Fan Unit1. Read See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4 - 3.2. Remove the right side door.3. Remove the SCSI interface cable from the hot-swap SCSI hard disk drive bay.4. Remove the connectors of the fan unit from the mother board.5. Push the locking tab to unlock the cooling fan unit, and remove the fan unit

from the server.6. Reassemble the removed components.

4 - 24

Page 127: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing and Installing a Hot-Swap FanYour server includes two standard hot-swap fans and one optional hot-swap fan.

Checking a Fan StatusWhen a fan is failing, you can observe the fan failure in the following manner:

■ POST error code

■ Alert message via NEC ESMPRO application

■ System event logged by the optional remote management card

Removing a Hot-Swap Fan1. Read “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4 - 3.2. Remove the right side door.3. While pressing release tabs on the top of the fan, pull the fan out of the cooling

fan unit.

Figure 4 - 21 : Removing a Hot-Swap Fan

4. Install the right side door.

4 - 25

Page 128: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing a Hot-Swap Fan1. Read “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4 - 3.2. Remove the right side door.3. Insert the fan module into an empty slot of the cooling fan unit.

Figure 4 - 22 : Inserting a Hot-swap Fan

4. Install the right side door

4 - 26

Page 129: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Status Indicators

LampsThe following describes lamps on the server and their indications. See Chapter 1 foreach location.

LAN ACCESS Lamp ( )

The LAN ACCESS lamp lights green when the server is connected to LAN. The lampblinks while the server is accessed through the LAN (for packet transmission). Thevalue next to the icon indicates the number of the network port on the rear panel.

STATUS Lamp ( )

The STATUS lamp lights green when the server is in successful operation. When theSTATUS lamp is unlit, it indicates that the server has been shut down or has failed.When it flashes amber, it indicates that the server has failed.

The following table lists indications about the STATUS lamp, descriptions, and actionsto take.

Note:

■ If the server has the NEC ESMPRO or Off-line MaintenanceUtility installed, you can view the error log to identify thecause of a trouble.

■ To cycle power to the server, shut down the server from theOS to and reboot it, if available. If the shutdown from the OSis not available, disconnect and connect the power cord toreboot the server.

Table 4 - 2: Status LampSTATUS lamp indication

Description Procedure

On (green) The server is operating normally.Flashing (green) The server is operating with the

memory, CPU, or power supply unit in degraded state.

A single-bit memory error has often occurred.

Check the AC POWER lamp indication on the rear panel of the server.

Identify the device in degraded state by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP," and replace it as soon as possible.

1

4 - 27

Page 130: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

* Indicates only when the optional remote management card is installed in your system.

POWER/SLEEP Lamp ( )

The green POWER/SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server ispowered. When the server is off-powered, the POWER/SLEEP lamp stays unlit.

The POWER/SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-savingmode (sleep mode). If the OS supports the power-saving mode such as Windows 2000,pressing the SLEEP switch blinks the POWER/SLEEP lamp in green and places theserver in the power-saving mode. Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER/SLEEP lamp and place the server back in the normal mode.

Off* The power is off.POST is in progress. Wait for a while. The STATUS lamp turns

green when POST is completed.A CPU error occurred. Turn the power off and then turn it on. If

the POST screen displays an error message, take notes of the message, and contact your sales representative.

A CPU temperature alarm was detected. (Thermal-Trip)A timeout occurred when the time set for the watchdog timer arrived.A CPU bus error occurred.A memory dump request is made. Wait until the memory dump is

completed.On (amber)* A temperature alarm was detected. Check if the internal fans are clean and if

the fan units are firmly connected.

If the STATUS lamp indication does not change when the fans are normal, contact your sales representative.

A voltage alarm was detected. Contact your sales representative.All the power supply units failed.

Flashing (amber)* Either of the following was detected in the redundant power configuration:

AC power not supplied to one of the two power supply units

Failure of one of the two power supply units

Connect the power cord to supply power. If the power supply unit is faulty, contact your sales representative.

A fan alarm was detected. Check if the fan units are firmly connected.

If the STATUS lamp indication does not change when the fans are normal, contact your sales representative.

A temperature warning was detected.

Check if the internal fans are clean and if the fan units are firmly connected.

If the STATUS lamp indication does not change when the fans are normal, contact your sales representative.

A power supply alarm was detected. Contact your sales representative.

Table 4 - 2: Status Lamp (Continued)STATUS lamp indication

Description Procedure

4 - 28

Page 131: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

The power-saving mode is only available when the OS supports the power-savingfeature. Some OS's allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is made to the server for a certain period of time or toselect the power-saving mode with a command.

DISK ACCESS Lamp ( )

The DISK ACCESS lamp indicates the state of hard disks in the 3.5-inch hard diskdrive bay.

This lamp lights in green every time any of such hard disks is accessed.

When the DISK ACCESS lamp is lit in amber, it indicates that a hard disk erroroccurred. To identify a failed hard disk, see the lamps provided for each hard disk.

When the DISK ACCESS lamp lashes in green and amber by turns or in amber only, itindicates that hard disks connected to the internal disk array controller are in auto-rebuilding (reconfiguration).

Access Lamps

The access lamps for the floppy disk drive and the CD-ROM drive light when access ismade to a media in the drive.

Hard Disk Drive Lamp

The disk lamp on the 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay has different meanings depending onthe display status.

Figure 4 - 23 : Hard Disk Drive Lamp■ Lighting green

- Indicates that the power is supplied to the hard disk.

■ Blinking green

- Indicates that the hard disk is accessed.

■ Lighting amber

- Indicates that the installed hard disk is defected in the disk array configuration.

4 - 29

Page 132: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Note: While hard disks are in the disk array configuration(RAID1 or RAID5), a single failed hard disk does not affect theoperation of the server. However, it is recommended to replacethe failed hard disk and auto-rebuild (reconfigure) the harddisks as soon as possible. (You can hot-swap such a failed harddisk.)

■ Alternate lighting green or amber

- Indicates that the hard disk is being rebuilt (this status is not a failure). If thedefected hard disk is replaced with a new one in the disk array configuration,the data is automatically rebuilt (auto rebuild function). During the rebuild oper-ation, the lamp is lit green or amber alternatively.

- The lamp goes off when the rebuild is terminated normally. The lamp goes onamber if the rebuild fails.

Note: To abort rebuilding, power off the server. In such acase, restart the server, hot-swap the failed hard disk, andrestart rebuilding. Observe the following notes to use the auto-rebuild feature.

Caution■ Do not power off the server. (If the server is powered off

before rebuilding hard disks, the auto-rebuild feature will notstart.)

■ When you removed a hard disk, wait at least 90 secondsbefore installing the hard disk back again.

■ Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is inprogress.

4 - 30

Page 133: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Power Supply Lamps

Note: The following applies to hot-swap power suppliesonly.

The power supply on the rear of the server has two lamps.

Note: The server equipped with an optional power unit cancontinue the operation with the normal power unit if the otherpower unit is defected (redundant function). The defectedpower unit can be replaced with a new one in the hot-swapmode without power interruption.

Figure 4 - 24 : Power Led (left) - Power Failed Led (right)

Table 4 - 3: Power Supply Lamps

Power supply conditionPower Supply LEDsLED #1 (Power) Green LED #2 (FAIL) Amber

No AC power to all PSU OFF OFF

No AC power to this PSU only or power supply failure or current limit

OFF ON

AC present / only standby output ON Blink green OFF

Power supply DC outputs ON and OK Green OFF

4 - 31

Page 134: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

LAN Connector Lamps

Each of the two LAN connectors on the rear panel has two lamps as follows.

■ LINK/ACT lamp

The link/ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equippedwith the server. If the power is supplied to the server and the hub and they arecorrectly connected with each other, the lamp is lit green (LINK state). Ifinformation is transmitted through a network port, the lamp blinks green (ACTstate).If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cableconnection. If the lamp is not lit still after the checking, the network (LAN)controller may be defected. Contact your service representative.

■ 1000/100/10 lamp

The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates whether each of the network ports normallyequipped with the server is operated through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or10BASE-T network interface. If the lamp is lit amber, the network port is operatedthrough 1000BASE-T. If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.

4 - 32

Page 135: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing and Removing 5.25-inch DevicesThe server contains four slots in which backup devices including CD-ROM andmagnetic tape drives can be installed.

Figure 4 - 25 : 5.25-inch Device Slots

Notes:

■ The server can include a maximum of two devices: two half-height devices, or one half-height device and one full-heightdevice.

■ Set the SCSI termination of the 5.25-inch device to OFF andthe SCSI ID to a value which is not assigned to any otherdevice. Refer to the vendor documentation that comes withthe device on how to set the values.

■ For half-height device, first install a device in slot 1. Theninstall another device in slot 2.For full-height device, install the device in the slots 2 and 3.

A Slot 1B Standard CD-ROM driveC Slot 2D Slot 3

D

C

B

A

4 - 33

Page 136: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing a 5.25-Inch Media Device1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions listed under “General Information”

and “Static Precautions” on page 4-2.2. Prepare your system for upgrade. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on

page 4-3.3. Remove the right side door. See “Removing the Right Side Door” on page 4-4.4. Disconnect the front cooling fan cable (A) from the motherboard and remove

the front cooling fan unit from the chassis.

Figure 4 - 26 : Disconnecting the Front Cooling Cable

CautionObserve static precautions. Use an antistatic wrist strap.

5. Remove the dummy cover from the bay where you are installing a mediadevice. The dummy cover is released by removing the two screws holding it inplace.

Figure 4 - 27 : Removing the Dummy Cover

A

4 - 34

Page 137: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Note: When installing a full-height device, remove twodummy covers.

6. Remove the device from its protective wrapper and place it on an antistaticsurface. Record the drive model and serial number in the equipment log.

7. Set any drive jumpers or switches before you install the drive. See thedocumentation that comes with the device for jumper or switch information.

8. Attach the mounting rails to the device with the four screws that come with thedevice.

Figure 4 - 28 : Attaching the Device Mounting Rails

Notes:

■ If the drive comes with drive rails, do not use them. Removeany rails already attached.

■ When installing a double-height device, use the DLT devicerails that come with the server.

CautionWhen installing mounting rails on a removable device alwaysuse the screws that come with the device. Using longer screwsor those of different diameter may cause damage to the device.

9. Install the media device into the bay as follows:■ Move any cables in the bay out of the way.

■ Align the rails on the media device with the support guides in the bay.

■ Slide the device into the bay until the slide rails are flush with the system.

4 - 35

Page 138: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Note: Make sure that the cables are not caught while the5.25-inch device is pushed into the slot.

CautionIf a 5.25-inch device occupying two slots cannot be insertedeasily, push the device to the slots with it lifted a little.

10. Check whether the installed 5.25-inch device is projected too much from thefront of the server.Check the device installed in a 5.25-inch device bay based on the CD-ROMdrive normally installed.

11. Secure the device to the system with the screws removed in step 5 above.

Figure 4 - 29 : Securing a Removable Media Device

Single-height device Double-height device

4 - 36

Page 139: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

12. Connect the SCSI or IDE interface cable to the device.

Figure 4 - 30 : SCSI Interface Cable

CautionConnector pin bending or incomplete connection may cause amalfunction to occur. Provide the connection securely watchingthe 5.25-inch device and cable connectors.

Note: Make sure that the cable is not caught.

13. Connect the power cable to the device.14. Reinstall the right side door on the system chassis. See “Installing the Right

Side Door” on page 4-5.15. Plug in the system power cord(s), and turn on the system.

A System board SCSI connectorB Not usedC 5.25-inch device bay SCSI connector for slot 1D 5.25-inch device bay SCSI connector for slot 2E Terminator

A B C D

E

A B C D

E

4 - 37

Page 140: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing a 5.25-Inch Media Device1. Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 of “Installing a 5.25-Inch Media Device” described

earlier in this chapter.2. Disconnect the SCSI or IDE interface cable and voltage cable from the rear of

the device you are removing.3. Remove the two screws securing the device to the removable media device

bay. See "Figure 4 - 29 : Securing a Removable Media Device" on page 4-36.4. Slide the removable media device out of the device bay and set it down on an

antistatic surface.

CautionObserve static precautions. Use an antistatic wrist strap.

5. Remove the screws securing the device mounting rails to the device and set therails and screws aside for future use. See "Figure 4 - 28 : Attaching the DeviceMounting Rails" on page 4-35.

6. To install a replacement device, perform steps 5 through 13 of "Installing a5.25-Inch Media Device” described earlier in this chapter. Otherwise, continuewith the next step.

7. Install a dummy cover into the vacated bay (see "Figure 4 - 27 : Removing theDummy Cover" on page 4-34).

8. Reinstall the front cooling fan unit in the chassis and reconnect the frontcooling fan cable connector to the motherboard.

9. Reinstall the right side door on the system chassis. See " Installing the RightSide Door" on page 4-5.

10. Plug in the system power cord(s) and turn on the system.

4 - 38

Page 141: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing or Removing a PCI BoardYour server's expansion capabilities meet the needs of file and application servers forhigh performance I/O by providing a combination of PCI expansion slots. This sectiondescribes how to install and remove the PCI option boards.

The I/O expansion slots in your server are located on the system board. See"Motherboard" on page 1-10.The system board has one 33 MHz PCI connector slots that accommodate 32 bit PCIcards, two 100 MHz PCI-X and one 133 MHz PCI-X connector slots thataccommodate 64 bit PCI cards and two PCI-Express connector slot (x8).

CautionAny PCI board is easily affected by static electricity. Handle aPCI board after making your body contact with a metallic framesection of the server to discharge the static electricity on yourbody. Do not make bare hands contact with terminals andcomponents on the PCI board. In addition, do not put the PCIboard on a desk directly. See "Static Precautions" on page 4-2.

Note: When a PCI board is installed, removed, or removedfrom the present slot and then installed in another slot, modifythe detailed settings including the interrupt lines (IRQ) by usingthe BIOS setup utility SETUP if necessary. See "BIOS SetupUtility" on page 3-3 for the settings of the interrupt line statesand I/O spaces at the shipment of the server.

4 - 39

Page 142: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing an Option Board

Caution■ For ease of installation, remove the external SCSI cable

when installing the full-length PCI card.

■ 3.3V or universal PCI boards can be installed in PCI boardslots #2, #3, and #6.

■ 5V or universal PCI boards can be installed in PCI board slot#1.

■ The Adaptec ZCR RAID controller can only be installed inthe PCI Slot #2

Note: To install a PCI board, make sure that the boardconnecting section is engaged with the connector of the PCIboard slot.

4 - 40

Page 143: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

To install a board connected to a PCI board slot:

1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions listed under “General Information”and “Static Precautions” on page 4-2

2. Prepare your system for upgrade. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” onpage 4-3.

3. Remove the right side door. See “Removing the Right Side Door” on page 4-4.4. Remove the expansion slot connector cover and save the connector cover for

future use.5. Remove the expansion slot screw.6. Remove the expansion slot cover from the inside of the cabinet by pushing it

out the rear of its expansion slot with your fingers. Save the expansion slotcover for future use.

Figure 4 - 31 : Removing the Expansion Slot Screw and Cover

7. Remove the option board from its protective wrapper, holding the board onlyby the edges. Do not touch the board components or the gold connectors.

CautionObserve static precautions. Use an antistatic wrist strap.

8. Record the option board serial number in the equipment log.9. Set any board jumpers or switches as described in the documentation that

comes with the option board.

4 - 41

Page 144: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

10. While holding the board by its top edge or upper corners and its componentside facing down, firmly press the board into an expansion slot on the systemboard. The tapered foot of the option board retaining bracket must fit into themating slot in the expansion slot.

Figure 4 - 32 : Installing an Option Board

CautionIf the board cannot be installed easily, remove the board onceand then reinstall it. Excess force added to the board maycause the board to be broken.

11. Align the rounded notch in the retaining bracket with the threaded hole in thefront expansion slot frame and the rear guide rail. The retaining bracket fitsinto the space that was occupied by the expansion slot cover.

12. Reinstall the setscrew in the threaded hole. Be sure to push the bracket slot upagainst the setscrew before you tighten it. If this is not done, the bracket mayinterfere with an adjacent bracket.

13. Connect any external cables (if they are needed) to the installed option board.14. If you installed a full-length PCI board you must also align the rear edge of the

PCI board with the guide slots located in the fan cover.15. If applicable, reinstall all components removed earlier in step 4.16. Replace the right side door and close the front door.17. Plug in the system power cord(s), and power on the system.18. Check that no error message appears during the POST. If an error message

occurs, write down the message and review the error message listed inchapter 5.

19. Start the "BIOS Setup Utility" to set the "Reset Configuration Data" in the"Advanced" menu to "Yes".

A Guide rail

A

4 - 42

Page 145: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing an Option Board

Note: Expansion slot covers must be installed on all vacantslots to maintain the electromagnetic emissions characteristicsof the system and to assure proper cooling of the systemcomponents.

1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions listed under “General Information”and “Static Precautions” on page 4-2.

2. Prepare your system for upgrade. See “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” onpage 4-3.

3. Remove the right side door. See “Removing the Right Side Door” on page 4-4.4. Disconnect any cables attached to the option board you are removing.5. Remove and save the option board retaining bracket setscrew.6. Hold the board at each end and carefully rock it back and forth until the edge

connectors pull free. Make sure that you do not scrape the board against othercomponents.

7. Remove the board from the expansion slot and place it in an antistatic wrapper.If you are replacing a board, go to “Installing an Option Board” on page 4-40,otherwise continue.

8. Insert an expansion slot connector cover into the vacated slot.9. Install an expansion slot cover over the vacant slot using the previously

removed setscrew.10. If applicable, reinstall all components removed earlier in step 4.11. Reinstall the right side door on the system chassis. See “Installing the Right

Side Door” on page 4-5.12. Plug in the system power cord(s), and turn on the system.

4 - 43

Page 146: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing or Removing a RAID Controller BoardThe RAID controller board is an optional PCI board developed to improve datareliability.The board can be installed to use the hard disks in the 3.5-inch disk bay of the serverand those in additional disk unit in the disk array configuration.

The server can include the following optional RAID controller:

■ SCSI disk array controller (SecuRAID 114, LSI one channel SCSI RAIDcontroller)

■ SCSI disk array controller (SecuRAID 321, LSI two channel SCSI RAIDcontroller)

■ Adaptec Zero Channel Controller.

See the manual that comes with your RAID controller for details.

Please note the following when installing and configuring a disk array:

■ Disk array controller boards are easily affected by static electricity. Handle the diskarray controller board only after making body contact with the metallic framesection of the server chassis in order to discharge the static electricity from yourbody. Also, never make contact with terminals and components on the disk arraycontroller board using your bare hands.

■ To change the disk array configuration or the RAID level, the hard disks must beinitialized. If important data is saved on the hard disks used to constitute a diskarray, first back up the data on the other hard disks and then install the boards andconfigure the disk array.

■ More than one hard disk is required to configure a disk array.

■ Hard disks used in the disk array configuration should have the same diskrevolution rate and capacity.

■ Several RAID (Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks) levels can be set for thenewly installed disk array controller boards. For details of the available RAIDtypes, data transfer rate, and array configurations refer to the online documentationon the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your system or the vendordocumentation that comes with the disk array controller.

Table 4 - 4: Functions of a Disk Array ControllerFunction DescriptionLevel Support RAID levels RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, and RAID0+1.Hot swap Allows a hard disk to be replaced while the system is running

depending on RAID level and system configuration.Auto rebuild After the defected hard disk is replaced with a new one, the data

saved in the defected hard disk is automatically recovered from the data saved in the remaining hard disks depending on RAID level.

Expand capacity The addition of a hard disk without system interruption can automatically expand the area in which disk arrays are available.

4 - 44

Page 147: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

■ The available capacity of the hard disks in the disk array configuration will belower than the capacity of the hard disks in a standard configuration, but the diskreliability is much improved.

■ Use the configuration utility to restore the disk array configuration information inthe disk array controller boards. For details, refer to the online documentation onthe EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your system or the vendordocumentation that comes with the disk array controller. If a disk array controlleris replaced, use the proper utility to create new configuration information.

■ Up to four disk array controller boards can be installed in the server.

■ Set "PCI Slot n ROM (n: slot number)," a parameter of the slot in which a harddisk is installed, to "Enable" in "PCI Configuration" on the Advanced menu of theBIOS utility SETUP.

■ When more than one disk array controller board are installed in the server, installthe disk array controller board to which the system disk to be booted is connectedin the lowest PCI slot number.For example, if four disk array controller boards are installed in PCI slots #2, #3,and #6, the system disk should be connected to the board installed in PCI slot #1.

Using Internal Disks in Disk Array ConfigurationFor the installation of the RAID controller board, see “Installing or Removing a PCIBoard” on page 4-39 and the manual that comes with the RAID controller board. Youcan also refer to the Online Documentation of the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

Table 4 - 5: Boot prioritySlot No. Boot priority#6 6#5 5#4 4#3 3#2 2#1 1

4 - 45

Page 148: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Disk Array Configuration of Additional Disk UnitThe additional disk unit is exclusively used for installation of hard disks. The cabinetcan contain up to 14 hard disks. The server equipped with disk array controller boardscan be connected with up to four additional disk units.

Notes:

■ The additional disk unit does not contain hard disk drives.Purchase the drives additionally.

■ To connect with additional disk unit, use the server of rack-mount type or use the additional disk unit of tower type (ped-estal type). You will need an optional conversion kit.

After the connection of the additional disk unit to the server, provide the disk arrayconfiguration for the additional disk unit by using the Disk Array Configuration. Seethe manual that comes with the disk array controller for details.

SCSI Controller BoardSCSI controller board is a PCI board to control hard disk drives and file devices thatoperate through the SCSI interface.

The SCSI controller board is necessary in the following cases:

■ Installing a file device in the 5.25-inch device bay of the server

■ Using a SCSI hard disk as an internal hard disk

■ Connecting external SCSI equipment.

Notes:

■ The SCSI controller board is an electronic component easilyaffected by static electricity. Before handling the SCSI con-troller board, discharge static electricity from your body bytouching the metal frame of the server or the like. Do nottouch the terminals or parts of the SCSI controller board withyour bare hands, or do not place the SCSI controller boarddirectly on a desk. See “Static Precautions” on page 4-2 fordetails.

■ When connecting hard disks containing an OS to the SCSIcontroller board, install them in the PCI slots in ascendingorder of the slot numbers.

■ See “Installing or Removing a PCI Board” on page 4-39described earlier in this chapter for slots in which boards canbe installed.

4 - 46

Page 149: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing and Removing a MicroprocessorThe motherboard includes two Intel Xeon ZIF sockets. The primary and secondaryprocessor sockets are located as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4 - 33 : Processor Sockets

CautionAny CPU is easily affected by static electricity. Handle a CPUafter making your body contact with a metallic frame section ofthe server to discharge the static electricity on your body. Do notmake bare hands contact with the CPU pins. In addition, do notput any CPU on a desk directly. See “Static Precautions” onpage 4-2.

A Processor 1B Processor 2

A

B

4 - 47

Page 150: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Note: If the different revision of the processor is installed inthe multiprocessor system, Windows logs the followinginformation every startup. If this message is logged, it is noproblem for operation.

Installing a Microprocessor1. Read section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4-3.2. Open the server front door.3. Shutdown the operating system (OS).4. Press the power on/off switch on the front panel of the server.

The power-on LED goes out.5. Power off the peripheral devices.6. Unplug the system power cord(s) from the AC wall outlet(s).

Note: If the system power cord is connected to a powercontrol unit such as an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply),refer to the UPS user's guide for proper power-off procedures.

7. Remove the right side door of the chassis. See “Removing the Right SideDoor” on page 4-4.

4 - 48

Page 151: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

CautionFor proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the system withthe right side door removed. Always replace the panel beforepowering on the system.

8. Remove the processor air duct. See “Removing the Processor Air Duct” onpage 4-6.

9. Locate the CPU socket which you are going to install CPU.10. Raise the locking lever on the socket.

Figure 4 - 34 : Opening the CPU Socket Locking Lever

CautionOpen the lever until it stops. The bar can be opened to approxi-mately. 120 degrees.

X O

4 - 49

Page 152: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

11. Aligning the pins of the CPU with the socket, insert the CPU slowly and gentlyinto the socket.

Figure 4 - 35 : CPU and Socket Pin Marks

CautionBe aware of CPU direction. Pin layouts on two corners amongfour differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion. Confirmthe pin mark and pin layout on the socket, and insert the CPUcorrectly.

12. Push the CPU lightly to the socket, and push down the lever to secure the CPU.

Figure 4 - 36 : Inserting the CPU in the Socket

A Pin marks

A

4 - 50

Page 153: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

13. Install the heat sink on the CPU.

Note: Be aware of direction of heat sink.

Figure 4 - 37 : Installing the Heatsink on the CPU

14. Secure four screws to fix the heat sink.

Note: Tighten four screws temporarily in the following ordershown in the figure below, and then completely tighten allscrews.

Figure 4 - 38 : Tightening the Heatsink Screws

4 - 51

Page 154: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

15. Make sure that the heat sink is level.

Notes:

■ If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and then install itagain. The following probably causes the heat sink not to belevel:

- The CPU is not positioned correctly.- The wire clip is not engaged correctly.

■ Do not move the secured heat sink.

16. Reinstall the processor air duct.17. Reinstall the right side door. See “Installing the Right Side Door” on page 4-5.18. Plug in the system power cord(s) and turn on the system.19. Power on the server, start the SETUP utility, and set "Processor Retest" of

"Processor Settings" on the Main menu to "Enable".20. Check that POST displays no error messages. If POST displays an error

message, take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in“POST Error Messages ” on page 5-25.

21. Run the BIOS Setup Utility. Set "Reset Configuration Data" on the Advancedmenu to "Yes". This setting is required to change the hardware configurationdata.

22. When adding a CPU to a server with one CPU installed:For Windows 2000, change the driver of [Computer] in the device manager to[ACPI multi-processor PC] and then update the system.

Removing a MicroprocessorTo remove the CPU, prepare the removal referring to steps 1 and 12 in the installationprocedure and do the reverse procedure of steps 21 to 15. Remove the heat sink byusing a flat-tip screwdriver for the fixing metal fitting.

Caution■ Do not remove any CPU unless it is failed.

■ To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the dustcover onto the processor #2 socket when the CPU is notinstalled to #2 socket.

■ After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bot-tom of the heat sink adhere to the CPU. To remove the heatsink from the CPU, first turn the heat sink to the left and rightlightly to make sure that the heat sink can be apart from theCPU. Removing the heat sink with it adhering to the CPUmay cause the CPU and/or socket to be defected.

4 - 52

Page 155: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed (or replaced):

1. Start SETUP to select menus "Main" - "Processor Settings" - "ProcessorRetest" in the order to clear the error information on the removed CPU (seeChapter 3).When a CPU is replaced, select menus "Main" - "Processor Settings" toconfirm that the ID and L2 Cache of the additional CPU are defined normally(see Chapter 3).

2. Set "Reset Configuration Data" on the Advanced menu to "Yes."This is required to update the hardware configuration information. SeeChapter 3 for details.

4 - 53

Page 156: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing or Removing DIMM

DIMMThe DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) is installed in a DIMM socket on the motherboard installed in the server.

The motherboard contains four pairs of sockets in which DIMMs are installed. At leasttwo DIMMs are installed in DIMMs #5 and #6. (The DIMMs normally installed maybe replaced.)

DIMMs are installed on the sockets in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers inthe unit of two modules.

Figure 4 - 39 : DIMMs

Caution■ The DIMM is easily affected by static electricity. Handle the

DIMM after making your body contact with a metallic framesection of the server to discharge the static electricity onyour body. Do not make bare hands contact with terminalsand components on the DIMM. In addition, do not put theDIMM on a desk directly. See "Static Precautions" for detailsof the static electricity.

■ Do not use any DIMM not approved by the server manufac-turer. If an unapproved third party's DIMM is installed in theserver, not only the DIMM but also the server itself may bedefected. You will be charged by any repair of a malfunctionor defect caused by such a device within the warrantyperiod.

DIMM #8DIMM #7DIMM #6DIMM #5DIMM #4DIMM #3DIMM #2DIMM #1

4 - 54

Page 157: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

■ Due to an interleave device, add two DIMMs in banks.*1 Theserver does not operate if DIMMs of different specificationsare installed in a single bank.

- Each pair of slots #1 and #2, slots #3 and #4, slots #5and #6, and slots #7 and #8 in the figure on the previ-ous page constitutes a bank.

- The specification of a DIMM is described on the labelput on the board as follows:

- DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the followingorder:#5 and #6, #3 and #4, #1 and #2, then #7 and #8.

■ Install DIMMs starting from the one having largest capacity.

■ Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all beregistered.

■ Take a note of beep code pattern, and take appropriateaction according to the table listed earlier in "Beep Codes".

Note:

■ Up to 16GB (2GB × 8) of memory can be added.

■ If six or more DDR333 SDRAMs are installed, the systemoperates at DDR266 standard.

■ In the error messages and logs in POST, NEC ESMPROManager, or Off-line Maintenance Utility, the DIMM connec-tor may be called group. The number next to a group meetsthe connector number in the figure shown in the previouspage.

Example: Frequency of 333 MHz, buffered, capacity of 512 MB,raw address of 12 bits, column address of 10 bits, andsingle side

333 / B / 512 / R12 C10 S

Single sideColumn address

Raw addressCapacity

BufferedF

4 - 55

Page 158: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing DIMMInstall a DIMM proceeding as follows.

1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier toprepare.

2. Remove the components as follows:■ right side door

■ Top air duct

3. Confirm the socket in which a DIMM is installed.4. Open the levers at both ends of the socket.

CautionDo not apply an excessive pressure on the lever.

5. Push the DIMM to the socket straight.

CautionUse extreme care when installing a DIMM. Applying too muchpressure can damage the socket. Keyed DIMMs insert only oneway.

If the DIMM is inserted into the DIMM socket, the lever is automaticallyclosed.

Figure 4 - 40 : Inserting the DIMM

4 - 56

Page 159: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

CautionInstall one pair of DIMMs at a time. In addition, use a set ofmemory devices with the same specification. The specificationof a memory device is described on the label put on the deviceas follows:

6. Gently push the levers to the upright position until they engage the notches inthe DIMM

7. Install the removed components.8. Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does

not appear in POST.If an error message appears, write down the message and review the errormessage list in Chapter 5.

9. Start SETUP to select "Advanced" → "Memory Configuration" on menus.Then make sure that the status of the additional DIMM is set to "Normal" (seeChapter 3).

10. Set "Reset Configuration Data" on the Advanced menu to "Yes". This isrequired to update the hardware configuration. See Chapter 3 for details.

11. When the Windows operating system is used, set the paging file size to therecommended value or larger. Installed memory capacity × 1.5 (See AppendixD.)

Example: Frequency of 333 MHz, buffered, capacity of 512 MB,raw address of 12 bits, column address of 10 bits, andsingle side

333 / B / 512 / R12 C10 S

Single sideColumn address

Raw addressCapacity

BufferedFrequency

4 - 57

Page 160: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing DIMMRemove DIMM proceeding as follows.

Caution■ To remove the defected DIMM, check the error message

appearing in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMMsocket (group) in which the defected DIMM is installed.

■ The server operates only when at least two DIMMs areinstalled.

1. See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier toprepare.

2. Remove the right side door.3. Expand the levers at the both ends of the socket for the DIMM to be removed

leftward or rightward. The lock is released to allow the DIMM to be removed.

Figure 4 - 41 : Removing DIMM4. Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does

not appear in POST. If an error message appears, write down the message andreview the error message list in Chapter 5.

5. Start the SETUP to select "Advanced" → "Memory Configuration" →"Memory Retest" on the menus to clear the error information on the removedDIMM (see Chapter 3).

6. Set "Reset Configuration Data" on the "Advanced" menu to "Yes." This isrequired to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 3 fordetails.

4 - 58

Page 161: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing a Remote Management CardRemote Management card (RMC) is an optional expansion card that includes theBaseboard Management Controller (BMC) based on IPMI 1.5.

See “Remote Management Card (RMC)” on page 1-13.

CautionThe RMC is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sureto touch the metal frame of the server to discharge staticelectricity from your body before handling the RMC. Do nottouch the RMC terminal pins with bare hand or place the RMCdirectly on the desk. For static notes, see “Static Precautions”on page 4-2.

Figure 4 - 42: Remote Management Card Slot

Note: The illustrations in this subsection might slightly differfrom your optional remote management card.

A RMC slot

A

4 - 59

Page 162: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Installing a Remote Management Card1. Read section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4-3.2. Remove the right side door.3. Stick the shock absorbers to the back of the RMC.

Refer to the manual that comes with the RMC for detail location.

Figure 4 - 43: Sticking the Shock Absorbers to the RMC

4. Insert the RMC into the RMC slot.Align the notch in the bottom of the RMC with the keyed socket on the RMCslot.

Figure 4 - 44: Inserting the RMC in its Slot

5. Press down the RMC until it locks.

Figure 4 - 45: Locking the RMC

4 - 60

Page 163: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

6. Check to see that the RMC is fixed with both levers on the RMC slot.

Figure 4 - 46: RMC Locking Levers

7. In the case of an Advanced Remote Management Card (ARMC):■ Assemble the management network card that attached to the ARMC and

install the card to the riser card.

■ Connect the internal cable that attached to ARMC to ARMC and themanagement network card as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4 - 47: ARMC Internal Cable

.

Figure 4 - 48: Internal Cable Routing

4 - 61

Page 164: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

8. Reassemble the server.9. Turn on the server and check that the no error messages other than the

following message are displayed on the POST screen.

See “POST Error Messages ” on page 5-25.10. Place the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and reboot

the server.11. Run "Initialise Remote Management Card".12. Run BIOS SETUP utility and check to see that the menus related to the RMC

are displayed.Refer to “BIOS Setup Utility” on page 3-3 for details. If no additional menusare displayed, reinstall the RMC.

13. In the BIOS SETUP utility, select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] in the[Advanced] menu.This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See “BIOSSetup Utility” on page 3-3 for details.

14. Reboot the server and run EXPRESSBUILDER to save system information.15. If the advanced remote management card is installed and KVM console feature

is used, update the graphics accelerator.

Note: Refer to the manual that comes with an optionaladvanced remote management card for the monitor resolution.

16. Uninstall NEC ESMPRO Agent if installed.17. Re-install NEC ESMPRO Agent.

To correct the system information and event log from the management PC,NEC ESMPRO Agent must be installed in the server.

H/W Configuration of BMC is corrupted.!!Update BMC H/W Configuration by configuration tool!!!!Refer to BMC configuration manual!!

4 - 62

Page 165: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Removing a Remote Management Card1. See section “Preparing Your System for Upgrade” on page 4-3.

CautionThe remote management card logic monitors and logs systemvol tage changes. When removing the RMC from themotherboard, you may experience a 3 - 4 second delay fromthe time your system powering down.

2. Remove the right side door.3. Open the levers on the both sides of the RMC connector to unlatch the RMC.

Figure 4 - 49: Unlocking the RMC

4. Remove the RMC from its slot.5. Run BIOS SETUP utility and check to see that menus related to the RMC are

not displayed in the Server menu.See “BIOS Setup Utility” on page 3-3 for details.

6. Run BIOS SETUP utility and select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] inthe [Advanced] menu.This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See “BIOSSetup Utility” on page 3-3 for details.

7. Uninstall NEC ESMPRO Agent if it is installed.8. (Re)install NEC ESMPRO Agent.

To correct the system information and event log from the management PC,NEC ESMPRO Agent must be installed in the server.

4 - 63

Page 166: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

4 - 64

Replacing the BatteryAll motherboards use a battery to maintain system configuration information. If it failsto maintain system configuration, replace it with an identical rated battery from thesame manufacturer.

Remove the battery from the motherboard as follows:

CautionRemoving the battery from the motherboard causes the com-puter to lose system configuration information. Before removingit, run Setup and record the system configuration settings. Use this information to restore the system after replacing thebattery.

1. Turn off and unplug the system unit and any external options connected to thesystem.

2. Remove the right side door. See “Removing and Installing the Right SideDoor” on page 4-4.

3. Locate the battery on the motherboard. See “Motherboard” on page 1-10.4. Use your finger to carefully remove the battery from the battery socket on the

motherboard.

WarningThe battery may explode if it is incorrectly replaced or improp-erly discarded.Use only an identical rated battery from the same manufacturer.

5. With the positive (+) side facing up, press the new battery into the socket.6. Replace the right side door.7. Connect external peripherals and power cables.8. Run Setup to reconfigure system parameters.

Page 167: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Internal CablingInternal cable connections of the server are shown below.

Interface CablesAn example of the connections of interface cables between devices within the serverand external devices is shown below.

Standard Configuration

The figure below shows an example of the connections in the standard configuration.

A = SCSI #A B = SCSI #B C = Floppy Disk

Black line = IDE cable - Grey line = FDD cable - Dotted line = SCSI cable

Figure 4 - 50 : Standard configuration

Disk Array Configuration of Built-in Hard Disks

Using Onboard RAID Controller

The onboard SCSI controller supports the HostRAID feature that allows the internalhard disk drives to build the RAID configuration.

The figure below shows the cabling diagram that the standard hard disk drive bay andoptional HDD device expansion kit are used with the RAID configuration.

HostRAID supports the RAID levels of RAID0 and RAID1.

To enable HostRAID, run the SCSI BIOS utility (see online document in the NECEXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM).

5.25-inch device bay

3.5-inch hard disk drive bay

PCI-X #6PCIe #5PCIe #4

PCI-X #3PCI-X #2

PCI #1

A

B

C

CD-ROM

Option

FDD

Option

Option

4 - 65

Page 168: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

A = SCSI #A B = SCSI #B C = Floppy Disk D = IDE

Black line = IDE cable - Grey line = FDD cable - Dotted line = SCSI cable

Figure 4 - 51 : Using Onboard RAID Controller

Using Optional RAID Controller

The SecuRAID 321 Ultra320 SCSI dual-channel RAID and SecuRAID 114 Ultra320SCSI 1-channel RAID are optional add-in PCI RAID controllers that support RAID0,RAID1, and RAID5 levels of RAID.

Black line = IDE cable - Grey line = FDD cable - Dotted line = SCSI cable

Figure 4 - 52 : Using Optional RAID Controller - 1

HDD device expansion kit

Disk array

PCI-X #6PCIe #5PCIe #4

PCI-X #3PCI-X #2

PCI #1

A

B

C D

CD-ROM

Option

FDD

HDD device expansion kit

Disk array

CD-ROM

Option

FDD

PCI-X #6PCIe #5PCIe #4

PCI-X #3PCI-X #2

PCI #1

4 - 66

Page 169: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Using Optional RAID Controller

The Adaptec Zero Channel RAID controller has no SCSI connectors. It controls thehard disk drives via the onboard SCSI channels. The connected SCSI hard disk drivesare configured in RAID0, RAID1, and RAID5 levels of RAID

Both onboard SCSI channels are controlled by the Adaptec ZCR RAID controller. Ifyou want to add SCSI file devices in your system, an optional SCSI add-in controller isrequired (see figure below).

A = SCSI #A B = SCSI #B C = Floppy Disk D = IDE

Black line = IDE cable - Grey line = FDD cable - Dotted line = SCSI cable

Figure 4 - 53 : Using Optional RAID Controller - 2

Installing a SCSI File Device

With the standard configuration, you need an optional SCSI controller and internalSCSI cable to install a file device.

HDD device expansion kit

Disk array

PCI-X #6PCIe #5PCIe #4

PCI-X #3PCI-X #2

PCI #1

CD-ROM

Option

FDD

A

B

C D

4 - 67

Page 170: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Note: Onboard SCSI channels are controlled for the RAIDhard disk drives when an optional RAID controller (AdaptecZCR) is installed.

A = SCSI #A B = SCSI #B C = Floppy Disk D = IDE

Black line = IDE cable - Grey line = FDD cable - Dotted line = SCSI cable

Figure 4 - 54 : Installing a SCSI File Device

Set SCSI IDs as shown in the above figure. Set the terminator (Enabled/Disabled) forthe last-connected device in the SCSI chain. Set "Disabled" for all the middle devices.A terminating connector may be installed depending on the internal SCSI cable. If theSCSI cable ends with a terminating resistor, set "Disabled" for all the terminatingresistors of connected devices. For the settings, see the manual provided with eachdevice.

A file device needs settings such as a SCSI transfer rate. For the transfer rate, see themanual provided with the file device. Use the BIOS utility of the SCSI controller tomake the settings. For details, see the manual provided with the SCSI controller.

An onboard Ultra320 SCSI connector can be used to connect with internal SCSI filedevice.

Connecting with Additional Disk Unit /Sample Connection in Maximum Configuration

To connect an additional disk unit, or an external SCSI hard disk cabinet, to the server,the disk array controller board is required.

The additional disk unit can be connected to the server equipped with the disk arraycontroller board. (A single cabinet can contain up to 14 hard disks.)

PCI-X #6PCIe #5PCIe #4

PCI-X #3PCI-X #2

PCI #1

A

B

C D

SCSI Device ID2

SCSI Device ID1

CD-ROM

SCSI Device ID0

FDD

5.25-inch device bay

3.5-inch hard disk bay array

4 - 68

Page 171: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Note: To connect with additional disk unit, use the server ofrack-mount type, or use the additional disk unit of tower type(pedestal type). In both cases, you need an optional conversionkit.

The server can be connected with up to 521 hard disk drives.

In the configuration, the disk array configuration cannot be provided for the four harddisks installed in the 3.5-in disk bays.

Black line = IDE cable - Grey line = FDD cable - Dotted line = SCSI cable

Figure 4 - 55 : Connecting with Additional Disk Unit

SecuRAID 321 DAC

CD-ROM

Option

FDD

HDD device expansion kit

Disk array

4 - 69

Page 172: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Upgrading Your System

Power CableProper connector numbers of format Pnn (nn: numeral) are printed on the power cablesconnected to the power unit installed in the server. The connector numbers and thebuilt-in devices to which the connectors are connected are shown in the figures below.

Grey line = Power cable

Figure 4 - 56 : Power Cables - 1

Grey line = Power cable

Figure 4 - 57 : Power Cables - 2

Power supply5.25-inch device bay

3.5-inch hard disk bay array

5.25-inch device bay

3.5-inch hard disk bay array

4 - 70

Page 173: Nec 120 Lh User guide

5Problem Solving

■ Problem Solving

■ Static Precautions

■ Resetting the Server

■ Troubleshooting Guide

■ Problems at initial System Start-up

■ Problems After the System Has Been Running Correctly

■ Problems Running New Application Software

■ Problems and Suggestions

■ If You Need Assistance

■ Error Messages

■ Beep Codes

■ Status Indicators

■ Recovery for Windows 2000

■ Off-line Maintenance Utility

Page 174: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

5 - 2

500

Problem SolvingThis chapter helps you identify and solve problems that may occur during systeminstallation or while using your system. The first section of this chapter tells you how toreset your system in the event of problems. The next few sections providetroubleshooting checklists and procedural steps that help you isolate specific systemproblems. The last section includes BIOS and system user information.

WarningThe DC push-button on/off switch on the front panel does notturn off completely the system AC power. +5vdc is present onthe system board whenever the AC power cord is connectedbetween the system and an AC outlet. Before doing the proce-dures in this manual, make sure that your system is powered offand unplug the AC power cords from the back of the chassis.Not disconnecting power before opening your system can resultin personal injury and equipment damage

CautionRunning your system with the cover removed can damage yoursystem components. For proper cooling and airflow, always replace the right sidedoor before powering on your system.

Static PrecautionsAn electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and othercomponents. You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strapattached to chassis ground when handling system components.

Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, keepthem in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system.

Page 175: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

5 - 3

Resetting the ServerThere are two ways to reset the server.

CautionResetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data inprocess. To reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure that noprocessing is in progress.

■ Hard reset

Press the RESET switch at the front of the server (See “Forcing a Power Shutdown” inchapter 2).

CautionIf the remote power-on function is used, cycle the power once toload the OS, and turn off the power again in the normal way. If the processor is heated excessively, the circuit for protectingexpensive components is activated. If so, the POWER/SLEEPswitch cannot be used to control the power because the systemis entered into the reset status. Pull out the power cord and turnoff the power. After a while, check the operation environment(including the ambient temperature). Then connect the powercord and turn on the power. Wait a while before powering thesystem on again.

■ Soft reset

If the server halts before starting the OS, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.This restarts the server.

Page 176: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

5 - 4

Troubleshooting GuideIf your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.

Note: For provision against an unexpected failure, it isrecommended to install the Off-line Maintenance Utility, NECESMPRO, to the server and client computers.

System ViewersMonitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.

Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on themanagement PC. Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, DataViewer, or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager.

Page 177: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Problems at initial System Start-upProblems that occur at initial system start-up are often caused by incorrect installationof components or incorrect configuration. Hardware failure is a less frequent cause.

■ Are all cables properly connected and secure?

■ Is AC power available at the wall outlet?

■ Are the configuration settings correct in Setup? Are all drivers properly installed?

■ Are all the expansion cards fully seated in their slots on the motherboard?

■ Are all DIMMs installed correctly?

■ Is the processor fully seated in its socket on the motherboard?

■ Are switches and jumpers on the system board correct (if they have been changedfrom their original default settings)?

■ Are all jumper and switch settings on optional add-on cards and peripheral devicesset correctly? Check the documentation included with these devices for details.Ensure that there are no system resource conflicts between hardware components.(For example, two add-on cards could inadvertently share the same interrupt,resulting in a conflict.)

■ Are adapter cards and disk drives correctly installed?

■ Is the keyboard properly connected to the system and is it connected in the rightPS/2 port?

■ Is a bootable diskette installed in your system's floppy drive A:?

■ Is the hard disk properly formatted or defined?

■ Is the operating system properly loaded? Check the operating system documenta-tion.

5 - 5

Page 178: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Problems After the System Has Been Running Correctly

After the system hardware and software have been running correctly, problems canindicate equipment failure. Use the checklist below to try and correct the situation.

If the problem recurs after you have checked these items, refer to the TroubleshootingGuide section earlier in this chapter.

■ If you are running software from a diskette or CD, try using a new copy.

■ If you are running software from a hard disk drive, make sure that all of thenecessary files are installed. There may be a problem with the copy on the harddisk. Reinstall the software on the hard disk and try again.

■ If problems appear intermittently, there may be a loose cable, dirt in the keyboard(if keyboard input is incorrect), or other random component failures.

■ A transient voltage spike, power cut, or brownout may have occurred. Symptomsof voltage spikes include a flickering video display, unexpected system reboots,and the system not responding to user commands. If necessary, exit any openapplications and shut down your system power. Reboot the system, then load thesoftware and try again.

■ Voltage spikes can occasionally cause the heads of the disk drive to contact thedisk. This can corrupt or destroy data files. If you are experiencing voltage spikeson the AC electrical power line, install an uninterruptible power supply betweenthe power outlet and the system’s power cord.

5 - 6

Page 179: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Problems Running New Application SoftwareProblems occurring when you run new application software are usually related to thesoftware. Faulty equipment is much less likely, especially if other software runscorrectly. Use the checklist below to see if the situation may be easily corrected. If theproblem persists after you have checked these items, contact the software vendor'scustomer service.

■ Does the system meet the minimum hardware requirements for the software? Referto the software documentation.

■ Is the software an authorised copy? Unauthorized copies often do not work. Obtainan authorised copy of the software.

■ If you are running the software from a CD or diskette, is it a good copy?

■ If you are running the software from a CD, is the disc scratched or dirty?

■ Is the software correctly installed? Were all necessary procedures followed andfiles installed?

■ Are the correct device drivers installed?

■ Is the software correctly configured for the system?

■ Are you using the software correctly?

5 - 7

Page 180: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Problems and SuggestionsContact your Authorised Service Representative if the suggested actions do not solvethe problem.

Table 5 - 1: Problems and SuggestionsWhat to do What to doApplication software problems Make sure all cables are installed correctly.

Verify that your system hardware configuration is set correctly. In Setup, check the values against the system settings that you previously recorded. If an error is evident (wrong type of drive specified, for example), make the change in Setup and reboot the system. Record your change.Make sure the software is properly configured for the system. Refer to the software documentation for information. Try a different copy of the software to see if the problem is with the copy you are using.If other software runs correctly on the system, contact the vendor of the failing software.

Characters on screen are distorted or incorrect

Make sure the brightness and contrast controls are properly adjusted. Make sure the monitor's video signal cable and power cables are properly installed. (Shut down system power before reconnecting cables.) Make sure your monitor is compatible with the video mode you have selected. (Check your monitor's documentation.)

Characters do not appear on screen Make sure the monitor is plugged in and turned on. Are the brightness and contrast controls properly adjusted? Make sure that the video signal cable is properly connected. (Turn the system power off before reconnecting cables). Make sure your system's video adapter card is installed, enabled. Reboot the system.

CMOS RAM settings are wrong If system settings stored in CMOS RAM change for no apparent reason (for example, the time of day is in error), the backup battery may no longer have enough power to maintain the settings. Replace the battery.

Diskette drive light does not go on when drive is in use or is tested by POST.

Make sure the power and signal cables for the drive are properly installed. Check that the drive is properly configured and enabled in Setup.

Hard drive light does not go on when drive is in use or is tested by POST.

Make sure the power and signal cables for the drive are properly installed. Make sure the front panel connector is securely attached to the system board headers. Check that the drive is properly configured and enabled in Setup. Check the drive manufacturer's manual for proper configuration for remote hard disk drive activity.

Power on light does not go on If the system is operating normally, check the connector between the system board and the front panel. If OK, the light may be defective.

5 - 8

Page 181: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Problems with NEC Express ServerNo screen display appears and beep occurs.

■ Are DIMMs installed securely?

- Check that the DIMMs are securely inserted into the mating connectors.

- Check that DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the appropriatebanks. See Chapter 4 for the specifications of DIMMs.

CautionDIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order: #5 and #6, #1 and #2, #3 and #4, then #7 and #8.

- Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all be registered.

- Install DIMMs starting from the one having the largest size.

- Take a note on beep code pattern and take appropriate action according to thetable listed in the “Beep Codes” section.

The server does not power on:

■ Is the server properly supplied with power?

- Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets thepower specifications for the server.

- Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the powercord for broken shield or bent plugs.

- Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.

- If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it out-puts power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details. Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using theCMOS Setup utility of the server. <Menu to check: [Server] - [AC-LINK]>

■ Did you press the POWER switch?

- Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power (thePOWER/SLEEP lamp lights).

The server does not power on:

■ Is the power switch enabled?

- Restart the server and start the BIOS SETUP utility.<Menu to check: [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit]>

5 - 9

Page 182: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

■ Is the server running in the Secure Mode?

- The POWER switch is disabled in the Secure Mode. (Forced shutdown is alsonot available.) To release the Secure Mode, enter the password specified withthe BIOS SETUP utility.

POST fails to complete:

■ Is the DIMM board installed?

- At least one DIMM boards are required for operation.

CautionDIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order: #5 and #6, #1 and #2, #3 and #4, then #7 and #8.

- Install DIMMs starting from the one having the largest size.

■ Is the memory size large?

- The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait fora while.

■ Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you startedthe server?

- If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up,POST may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding.In such a case, restart the server once again. Do not perform any keyboard ormouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart theserver.

■ Does the server contain appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?

- Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.

Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):

■ Are cables properly connected?

- Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Alsomake sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.

■ Is the power-on order correct?

- When the server has any external devices connected, power on the externaldevices first, then the server.

■ Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?

- Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual thatcomes with the device to install its driver.

5 - 10

Page 183: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

■ Is BIOS configuration correct?

- When the server has PCI devices connected, make sure to set the PCI deviceinterrupt and others with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server. (Most PCIdevices generally do not require any change to the configuration, but someboards do require specific settings. Refer to the manual that comes with theboard for details to make correct settings.<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n ROM] - n: PCI slot number>

- Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I/O portaddress or operation mode settings. Refer to the manual that comes with theboard for details to make correct settings.

The POWER switch and sleep feature are disabled:

■ Is the server in the Secure Mode?

- In the Secure Mode, the POWER switch and sleep feature are disabled. Torelease the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUPutility.

The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:

■ Is the cable properly connected?

- Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of theserver.

- The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server ispowered (not applicable to USB devices). Power of the server first and connectit properly.

■ Is BIOS configuration correct?

- The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of theserver. Check the settings with the BIOS SETUP utility.<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Numlock]>

■ Are the server drivers installed?

- Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard andmouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.)Some OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to man-ual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings arecorrect.

■ Is the server in the Secure Mode?

- In the Secure Mode, the keyboard and mouse are disabled. To release the SecureMode, enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility.

Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:

■ Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?

- Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.

5 - 11

Page 184: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

■ Is the floppy disk write-protected?

- Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" posi-tion.

■ Is the floppy disk formatted?

- Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk.

■ Is BIOS configuration correct?

- The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of theserver. Check the settings with the BIOS SETUP utility.<Menus to check: [Main] - [Floppy A][Security] - [Diskette Write Protect]>

■ Is the server in the Secure Mode?

- In the Secure Mode, write access to the floppy may be disabled. To release theSecure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility.

Fail to access to the CD-ROM:

■ Is the CD-ROM properly set in the CD-ROM drive tray?

- The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that theCD-ROM is placed properly in the holder.

■ Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?

- The CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.

Inserted the correct CD-ROM but the message like the following is displayed: <The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted. Please insert the correct CD-ROM. OK >

■ Is the data side of the CD-ROM dirty or injured?

- Take the CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive, confirm that it is not dirty orinjured, reset and click [OK].

Fail to access the hard disk: (Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk arraycontroller.)

■ Is the hard disk applicable to the server?

- Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.

■ Is the hard disk properly installed?

- Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is notconnected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed (seechapter 4).

5 - 12

Page 185: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:

■ Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?

- Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.

■ Is the cable connection changed?

- The SCSI connector on the motherboard in the server can be used for eitherbuilt-in file devices or external SCSI devices. The connection to built-in orexternal devices can be switched by modifying cable connection properly. Seechapter 4 for details.

■ Are SCSI devices properly configured?

- When the server has external SCSI devices connected, devices settings, includ-ing SCSI ID and terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes withthe SCSI device for details.

■ Are the SCSI controllers (including optional controllers) properly configured?

- Use the BIOS SETUP utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices con-nected to the SCSI connector on the motherboard. When the server has anoptional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it, use theBIOS Setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper con-figuration. See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller fordetails.

Problems with Windows Server 2003When network cable is not connected with a port, the following log may be found inevent log. But this has no affect on the behavior of Lan driver. Event ID: 6 Source: E100B Type: Error Description: Hardware failure detected. Machine: Express5800/110Eh Lan: 100BASE Solution: Connect a network cable in a port and then reboot the system or change the[Smart Power Down] value to "Off", the log will not be found in event log any more.

Problems with Windows 2000Cannot install the operating system correctly.

■ Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?

During installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the EventViewer: Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0 during the paging operation.

- There is no problem with this issue.

5 - 13

Page 186: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Fail to start the OS:

■ Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?

- Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.

■ Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive?

- Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.

■ Is the OS broken?

- Use recovery process to recover the system. (See "Recovery for Windows 2000System" in this Chapter.)

The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log:

<Description (D)The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level.To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features ofthe least capable processor in the system. Should problems occur withthis system, contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processorsis supported.>

■ Has the CPU been expanded?

- If the different revision (stepping) of the processor is installed in the multipro-cessor system, Windows 2000 logs the above information every startup. If thismessage is logged, it is no problem for operation.

The OS presents unstable operation:

■ Did you update the system?

- Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable opera-tion. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to update the system.

The system does not restart automatically when a stop error occurs, though the systemis adjusted to automatically restarting:

- When the system does not restart automatically, restart it manually.

The system restarts automatically when a stop error occurs, though the system is NOTadjusted to automatically restarting:

- There is no problem about this issue. Check the System Event Log to confirmthat STOP error occurred.

Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:

- If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced shutdown(forced shutdown: continue to press POWER/SLEEP switch for 4 seconds). Thepower will not be turned off if you press the switch for less than 3 seconds.

5 - 14

Page 187: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

The server is not found on the network:

■ Is the LAN cable connected?

- Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of theserver. Also make sure that the LAN cable to use conforms to the network inter-face standard.

■ Is BIOS configuration correct?

- The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility ofthe server. Check the setting with the BIOS SETUP utility.<Menus to check:[Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Embedded NIC (Dual Gbit)]>

■ Have the protocol and service already configured?

- Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.

■ Is the transfer speed correct?

- Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "LinkSpeed & Duplex" value the same as the value specified for HUB.

Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDERWhen the server does not boot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, checkthe following:

■ Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server?

- If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart theserver, an error message will appear or the OS will boot.

■ Is BIOS configuration correct?

- The boot device order may be specified with the CMOS Setup utility of theserver. Use the CMOS Setup utility to change the boot device order to boot thesystem from the CD-ROM drive first.<Menu to check: [Boot]>

■ Is an error message displayed?

5 - 15

Page 188: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

- When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, thefollowing message appears. After this message appears, check the error andtake the appropriate corrective action according to the message listed in thetable below.

Problems with Express SetupFollowing message appears when you try to install Express Setup to the hard disk thathas smaller capacity than the specified partition size: “The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk. The setupcreated the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk. Setupwill continue the process.”

Then the system displays the OK button.

- It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.

The message “Press R to retry” can not be displayed correctly when copying the filesfrom CD-ROM or checking CD-ROM:

- Press R. When the message appears again even if you press R, restart theExpress Setup from the beginning. In case the same result occurred after therestart of installation, contact Maintenance Service Company and ask them tocheck the CD-ROM drive.

Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.

- There are some errors on the specified setup information. Follow the instructionto input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the installation. On Win-dows 2000, you might be asked to press Enter again after the last reboot of thesetup.

[Complete] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.

Table 5 - 2: Error MessagesMessage Cause and SolutionThis machine is not supported This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not

designed for this server. Execute the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server.

Hard disk access error The hard disk is not connected or has failed. Check whether the hard disk is correctly connected.

NvRAM access error An access to the non-volatile memory (NvRAM) has failed.

The system-specific information does not exist on the baseboard. Please restore the backup data or write the data by using [System Information Management] of the Off-line Maintenance Utility. Only the authorized personnel are allowed to do this operation.

The system-specific information can't be acquired on the mother board.

5 - 16

Page 189: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

- If you select [Complete] here, the setup will select the default value of ExpressSetup for the later specification to continue the process.

[Complete] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.

- The [Complete] does not appear if the Setup File that has already been createdis loaded.

- [Complete] appears only when you first entered the [Role of Computer] screen.Once you go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [Complete] willnot appear even if you enter [Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.

Select [Use Existing Array] at [New/Existing RAID Configuration], but the OS isinstalled in the whole area of the disk.

■ Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenancearea)? If no other partition exist, the setup will reserve the whole area of the disk toinstall operating system.

Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.

- When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install thesystem as Workgroup. Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining theDomain.

Specified large value as partition size, but when Windows 2000 is actually started, thesystem partition is created by 4095MB.

■ Is the [Partition Size] specified by the value larger than the real area?

- If you want to create one partition in all area of the hard disk (excluding themaintenance area) to install the OS, specify [All Area].

■ Are you specifying over 200GB for the partition size?

- Be sure to specify less than 200GB for the partition size.

Table 5 - 3: Default Value for Windows 2000Specification of network ProtocolProtocol TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]Service Select sharing Microsoft network files and

printer.Client Microsoft network client.Component SNMP, IIS (Excluding Professional)Application NEC ESMPRO Agent

Power Console Plus (When the optional SCSI RAID controller is installed)FastCheck (When the optional RAID S-ATA controller is installed)

5 - 17

Page 190: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Windows 2000 started with different display resolution from the specified value.

- If the specified display resolution can not be used, the system will use the near-est value or the default value of the driver.

Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.

- Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start.However, the setup will stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also inthis case, input request will occur when rebooting after GUI setup completedduring Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problemon Windows 2000 setup.

Unable to specify the details of Network adapter.

- In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter. Specifythem from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000.

Windows 2000 is started with Network adapter that has not been specified duringExpress Setup

- Windows 2000 will install the recognized Network adapter specified as defaultvalue. If you want to modify the specification, it can be done from ControlPanel after starting Windows 2000. Also, the Network adapter that has beenspecified during Express Setup but that is not connected will not be setup,though the protocol will only be installed.

Connected more than two Network adapter and specified different protocol for eachadapter, but all the protocols are specified on either adapter.

- It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can beused. The value that can not be specified during Express Setup will all be speci-fied by default value.

When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of TCP/IP protocol are all set to use DHCP.

- When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specificationof the protocol may all be set by default value. Re-specify the details from Con-trol Panel.

Not more than two Network adapter is connected, but the detailed specification of theprotocol are all set by default.(e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP isspecified)

- Are you specifying more than two protocols? In this case, the situation will bethe same as connecting more than two Network adapter, so the detailed specifi-cation of the protocol are all set by default. Re-specify the details from ControlPanel after starting the OS.

The following error log is included in the event log while operating the system:

5 - 18

Page 191: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

<Windows 2000>Event ID: 16Source: iANSMiniportType: ErrorCategory: NoneDescription: Team #0: The last adapter has lost link.Network connection has been lost.Event ID: 11Source: iANSMiniportType: WarningCategory: NoneDescription:Adapter link down: Intel(R) 82546EB Based Dual Port NetworkConnect...

Though the above error is included in the event log when specifying the teaming, theLAN driver can work properly.

Problems with Disk Array Configuration When an error is detected during the automatic Disk Array Configuration of the EasySetup process, any of the following messages appears.

■ An illegal device status exists in the status table.

■ An illegal status is returned during the Configuration Data read.

■ Configured device(s) is not responded.

■ The configuration in NvRAM does not agree with the configuration in EEPROM.

■ The number of pack configuring disks is 0 or 9 or above.

■ An error occurs during the configuration table read.

■ The configuration table in NvRAM cannot be read.

■ An illegal RAID level exists in the configuration table.

■ An error occurs during the CONFIG2 table transfer.

■ The adapter is not responded.

■ A CONFIG2 checksum error occurred.

■ Adapter is not exists.

When one of above messages is observed, the Disk Array controller or the hard diskdrive may be failed. Check that cable connections and switch settings are correct, andthen attempt to run NEC EXPRESSBUILDER once again.

Problems with Master Control Menu The master control menu fails to appear:

5 - 19

Page 192: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

■ Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?

- The CD-ROM Autorun feature is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows95. The older versions do not automatically start from the CD-ROM.

■ Is Shift pressed?

- Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.

■ Is the system in the proper state?

- The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the tim-ing to set the CD-ROM. In such a case, start the Explorer and run\MC\1ST.EXE in the CD-ROM.

Collecting Event Log This section describes on how to collect the log of various events that occurred on theserver.

CautionIf STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the proce-dure below after restarting the system.

Note: Different revision processors may be mixed in theadditional CPU kit. When Windows 2000 is used, followingmessage may display in the System Log of the Event Viewerafter installing different revisions of two or more CPUs in theNEC Express server. If this message is logged, it is no problemfor operation.

1. Click [Management Tool]: [Event Viewer] from the Control Panel. 2. Select the type of the log to collect.

On [Application Log], the events related to the running application is archived.On [Security Log], the events related to the security is archived. On [System

5 - 20

Page 193: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Log], the events occurred at the item which configures Windows system isarchived.

3. Click [Save as...] in the [Run] menu.4. Input the file name of archived log in the [File Name] box.5. Select the type of the log file you want to save in the [File Type] list box and

click [OK]. For more information, refer to Windows Online Help.

Collect Configuration Information This section describes how to collect the information on hardware configuration andinside specification.

In order to collect information, "Diagnostic Program" is used.

CautionIf STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the proce-dure below after restarting the system.

<For Windows Server 2003>

Refer to Windows online help.

<For Windows 2000>

1. Point to [Settings] in Start menu, and click [Control Panel].The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.

2. Double-click [Management Tool], and double-click [Computer Management].The [Computer Management] dialog box appears.

3. Click [System Tool]: [System Information].4. Click [Save as System Information File] in the [Operation] menu.5. Enter the file name to save in the [File Name] box.6. Click [Save].

Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location tosave the information can be specified as you like.

Memory Dump If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.

If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or"ARCServe" on the label. You can specify the location to save the diagnosticinformation as you like...

5 - 21

Page 194: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Caution■ Consult with your sales agent before dumping the memory.

Dumping the memory while the server is in process mayaffect the system operation.

■ Restarting the system due to an error may display a mes-sage indicating insufficient virtual memory. Ignore this mes-sage and proceed. Restarting the system may result indumping improper data.

Preparing for Memory DumpingMemory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such acase, it is required to force the server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, isnot available if "Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit" on the Security menu ofthe BIOS setup utility, SETUP, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.

Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown andrestart of the server.

1. Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility, SETUP.2. Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.3. Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.

Saving the Dump FilePress the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin(a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press theDUMP switch.

Figure 5 - 1 : Dump SwitchPressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memorydumping may not be available when the CPU stalls.)

1 2

5 - 22

Page 195: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

If You Need AssistanceIf you have a problem with your computer, first review the sections of ProblemSolving.

Note: Refer to the warranty booklet delivered with yoursystem to find out how to contact the local office in your country.

For technical support such as BIOS upgrades, consult our Web site at the followingaddress: http://www.nec-online.com.

5 - 23

Page 196: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

5 - 24

Error Messages

Error Messages after Power-onPowering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (PowerOn Self-Test). When the POST detects any error, it displays an error message and itsmeasure on the display unit.

Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is nohardware failure, use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes thePOST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing:

■ Immediately after the server is powered

■ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction(simultaneous key entry of Ctrl + Alt + Delete)

■ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction

■ During hardware initialization following restart of the POST

When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason, restart the serveronce again. If the same error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardwareerror. To ensure normal operation of the server, however, make sure to follow thefollowing restrictions.

■ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory countappears on the screen following the server power-on.

■ Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message ofthe Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.

CautionTake a note on the on-screen message before contacting yoursales agent. The alarm indication would be a great help for maintenance.

Page 197: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

POST Error Messages When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen.The following table lists error codes, error messages, and actions to take.

Note: Take a note on the messages displayed beforeconsulting with your sales agent. Alarm messages are usefulinformation for maintenance.

Table 5 - 4: POST Error MessagesError Code Error Message Recommended Action

0200 Failure Fixed Disk. Contact your service representative

0210 Stuck Key. Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.0213 Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch Release the lock of the key switch. If the error

cannot be corrected in spite of the release of the lock, contact your service representative

0220 Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run SETUP

Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be corrected in spite of the start of SETUP, contact your service representative

0230 System RAM Failed at offset Contact your service representative0231 Shadow Ram Failed at offset0232 Extended RAM Failed at address line0250 System battery is dead - Replace and run

SETUPContact your service representative to replace the battery. (After restarting the computer, start the SETUP to provide the setting again.)

0251 System CMOS checksum bad - Default configuration used.

The default values have just been set. Start the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.

0252 Password checksum bad - Passwords cleared.

The password has just been cleared. Start the SETUP to provide the setting again.

0260 System timer error. Start the SETUP to set the date and time again. If the same error occurs successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service representative.

0270 Real time clock error.

0271 Check date and time setting.

02B0 Diskette drive A error. Start the SETUP to set the "Legacy Floppy A" in the Main menu again. If the same error occurs successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service representative.

02B2 Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP. Start the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.

02D0 System cache error - Cache disabled. The cache cannot be used. Contact your service representative.

02D1 System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching limit.

Contact your service representative.

5 - 25

Page 198: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

02F4 EISA CMOS not write able

02F5 DMA Test Failed02F6 Software NMI Failed02F7 Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed0B22 Processors are installed out of order Request the maintenance to replace the CPU0B28 Unsupported Processor detected on

Processor 1Make sure that the server supports the CPU. If you are not sure, contact your service representative to request the maintenance

0B30 Fan 1 Alarm occurred Contact your service representative to replace the fan

0B31 Fan 2 Alarm occurred0B32 Fan 3 Alarm occurred0B5F Forced to use Processor with error Because an error is detected in every CPU, the

system is forcibly started. Contact your service representative

0B60 DIMM group #1 has been disabled Contact your service representative0B61 DIMM group #2 has been disabled0B62 DIMM group #3 has been disabled0B63 DIMM group #4 has been disabled0B70 The error occurred during temperature

sensor readingContact your service representative

0B71 System Temperature out of the range Contact your service representative to replace the fan.

0B74 The error occurred during voltage sensor reading

Contact your service representative

0B75 System voltage out of the range0B80 BMC Memory Test Failed Turn off the power once and then on again to

start the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative0B81 BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed

0B82 BMC core Hardware failure0B83 BMC 1BF or 0BF check failed0B8B BMC progress check timeout. Turn off the power once and then on again to

start the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.0B8C BMC command access failed

0B8D Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy -0B8E Could not redirect the console - BMC Error -0B8F Could not redirect the console - BMC

Parameter Error -0B90 BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.0B91 BMC update firmware corrupted.0B92 Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted. This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power once

and then on again to restart the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.

0B93 BMC SDR Repository empty. Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.

0B94 IPMB signal lines do not respond. This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.

Table 5 - 4: POST Error Messages (Continued)Error Code Error Message Recommended Action

5 - 26

Page 199: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

0B95 BMC FRU device failure. This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.

0B96 BMC SDR Repository failure. Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.0B97 BMC SEL device failure.

0B98 BMC RAM test error.0B99 BMC Fatal hardware error.0B9A Management controller not responding. Update the RMC firmware. If the error cannot be

corrected, contact your service representative.0B9B Private I2C bus not responding. Turn off the power once and then on again to start

the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.

0B9C BMC internal exception.0B9D BMC A/D timeout error.0B9E SDR repository corrupt.0B9F SEL corrupt.0BB0 SMBIOS – SROM data read error0BB1 SMBIOS – SROM data checksum bad. 8100 Memory Error detected in DIMM group #1. Contact your service representative to replace

the DIMM in the relevant group. 8101 Memory Error detected in DIMM group #2. 8102 Memory Error detected in DIMM group #3. 8103 Memory Error detected in DIMM group #4None Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Mass

Storage Controller in slot n (n: slot number)Disable initialization of the optional device expansion ROM by using the BIOS SETUP utility (see chapter 3)

H/W Configuration of BMC is corrupted.!!Update BMC F/W Configuration by configuration tool!!!!Refer to BMC configuration manual!!

Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to configure the optional remote management card (see appendix E).

Table 5 - 4: POST Error Messages (Continued)Error Code Error Message Recommended Action

5 - 27

Page 200: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

5 - 28

Beep CodesIf an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.

Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. Forexample, the beep interval 1-2-2-3 indicates 1 beep, pause, 2 beeps, pause, 2 beeps,pause, and 3 beeps notifying that the checksum error occurred on ROM.

*Beeps only when the optional management card is installed in your system.

Table 5 - 5: POST Error Beep Codes Beeps Error Recommended Action1-2 Option ROM initialization error 1. Check if the optional add-in card is properly installed.

2. Run the BIOS setup utility to check the IRQ assignment. 3. Ask your service representative to replace the add-in card or mother board.

3-3 ROM checksum error Replace the mother board. 1-2-2-3

1-3-1-1 DRAM refresh test error 1. Check if the DIMM is properly installed. 2. Remove the DIMM once, and then re-install it to check if it operates normally. 3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed DIMM or mother board.

1-3-1-3 Keyboard controller error 1. Check if the keyboard is properly connected. 2. Replace the mother board

1-3-3-1 No memory or capacity check error

1. Check if the DIMM is properly installed. 2. Remove the DIMM once, and then re-install it to check if it operates normally. 3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed DIMM or mother board

1-3-4-1 DRAM address error

1-3-4-3 DRAM test Low Byte error

1-4-1-1 DRAM test High Byte error

1-5-1-1* CPU startup error 1. Check if the CPU is properly installed. 2. Remove the CPU once, and then re-install it to check if it operates normally. 3. Ask your service representative to replace the failed CPU.

1-5-2-1* No CPU installed

1-5-4-4* Abnormal voltage

2-1-2-3 BIOS ROM copyright test error Replace the mother board.

2-2-3-1 Unexpected interrupt test error

Page 201: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

5 - 29

How to Identify BIOS Revision LevelTo identify your system's current BIOS revision level, perform the following procedure:

1. Power-on or reboot the system.2. Press F2. 3. In the Server menu, select System Management and press ENTER. The

BIOS revision level is displayed.

Page 202: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Recovery for Windows 2000If any file necessary for running the OS is damaged, use the following procedures torecover the system.

Caution■ After recovering the system, see the “Updating the System”

section in Appendix F. Also, on Windows 2000, you need toupdate all the drivers after the system update. For moreinformation, see “Installing and Setting Device Drivers” inAppendix F.

■ If the hard disk can not be recognized, you can not recoverthe system.

Follow the procedure below and use the information in the disk, not system recoverydisk, to recover the system.

1. Turn on the power of the system.2. Insert Windows 2000 CD- ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your server.3. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the server.

(You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)4. Press F6 while the message "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware

configuration..." is displayed at the upper part of the screen

Note: Nothing changes on the screen while F6 is pressed.

5. Press S when the following message displays:“Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devicesinstalled in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.”Select [Other] and press Enter.

6. Insert Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into thefloppy disk drive and press Enter.“Please inset the disk labeled manufacturer-supplied hardware support diskinto Drive A:* Press ENTER when ready.”Select the [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000)] and press Enter. Thesystem then returns to the same screen as in step 5.

7. If the optional board or SCSI HostRAID is installed, select the proper SCSIadapter and press Enter.

■ INITIO INI-A10XU2W SCSI Host Adapter

■ MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 Controller Driver

5 - 30

Page 203: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

■ MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 Controller Driver

■ Adaptec ZCR RAID Controller Driver Disk for 32bit Windows 2000/XP/2003

8. Press R to select the recovery option.9. Select the keyboard.10. If you are requested, press R to select system recovery procedure.11. If you are requested, select either of the procedure below:

■ [Manual Recovery] (Press M)Do not select this option unless you are a high-level user or a systemadministrator. If you use this option, you can recover the problems ofsystem files, partition boot sector, and start-up environment.

■ [Quick Recovery] (Press F)This option is very easy to use and the user does not need to do anythingduring the procedure. If you select this option, the system recovery diskprogram starts to recover the problems concerning system files, partitionboot sector of system disk, and start-up environment (if multipleoperating systems are installed on the system).

12. Follow the instruction displayed on the screen, and then press L whenprompted to insert system recovery disk. The system will be restarted once.

13. Repeat steps 1 to 10.The recovery procedure will start.During the recovery, the missing files and the damaged files are replaced eitherto the files in C:\ I386 folder of hard disk or the files in systemroot\ Repair ofthe system partition. These replaced files do not reflect the changes of theconfiguration after the setup at all.

14. Follow the instruction displayed on the screen.If you take a note of any file name in which trouble is detected during theprocedure, it is useful to diagnose how the system has been damaged.

15. Terminate the procedure if the recovery is successful.You can verify that the replaced files are correctly copied to the hard disk if thecomputer is restarted normally.

5 - 31

Page 204: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

Off-line Maintenance UtilityThe Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. Whenyou are unable to start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, theOff-line Maintenance Utility can be used.

Note:

■ The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of yoursales agent. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM andthe Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have cre-ated contain a file that describes operation of the utility, butdo not attempt to use the utility by yourself. Contact yoursales agent and follow instructions.

■ Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any accessfrom a client to the server.

Starting the Off-line Maintenance UtilityThe Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.

■ From the CD-ROM

Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive andreboot the system. When the menu displays, select "Tools" - "Off-line MaintenanceUtility". The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.

■ From the floppy disk

Insert the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive andreboot the system. The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the bootdisk. The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting "Tools"- "Create Support FD" on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

■ Manual start (by pressing F4)

When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-upscreen of the server is displaying. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from thehard disk.

Features of Off-line Maintenance UtilityThe Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available featuresvary depending on the way you started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)

Note: See the on-line help for details of the Off-lineMaintenance Utility. For further information, ask your salesagent.

5 - 32

Page 205: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

■ IPMI Information Viewer*

Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record(SDR), and field replaceable unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine amaintenance part.

■ BIOS Setup Viewer

Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with theSETUP utility to a text file.

■ System Information Viewer

Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS andexport it to a text file.

■ System Information Management

Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.

Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configurationmay not be restored.

Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data.

■ Start of Utilities

With the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you can start the following utilities installedin the maintenance partition.

- System Management*

- System Diagnostics

- Maintenance Partition Update

* Available only when the optional remote management card is installed.

5 - 33

Page 206: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Problem Solving

5 - 34

Page 207: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix A

Appendix A

SpecificationsTable A - 1: 120Lh Specifications

Express 5800 120LhCabinet design Middle-TowerCPU Minimum 2,8GHz/ up to 3.6GHz

Type Intel XeonΤΜ Processor

L2 Cache 1 MBFSB 800 MHzNumber of processors 1 (max: 2)Packaging Socket mPGA 478

Chipset Intel E7520 (800MHz)Memory Minimum 512 KB (256MB * 2)

Maximum 16 GB (2GB * 8 - optional)Architecture 2 way interleaveConnectors 8 memory connectors 168-pin wideMemory module 2 or 4 DIMMs: DDR333

6 or 8 DIMMs: DDR266Error check ECC

Video ATI RADEON 7000 (VRAM 8MB)Auxiliary storage device

Floppy disk (std) 3.5-inch drive * 1Hard disk (std) NoneHard disk (max) 879GB (146,5GB * 6)CD-ROM (std) 1.3TB (146,5GB * 9)

Device Bay 5.25” 4 bays including one optical drive: CD-ROM or DVD-ROM3.5” 1 bay including one 1.44 floppy disk drive

I/O Slots PCI-EX Slots 2 slots (8x)PCI-X Slots 1 * 64bit/ 133MHz (3.3V) slot

2 * 64bit/ 100MHz (3.3V) slotsPCI Slots 1 * 32bit/ 133MHz (5V) slot

RAID 0/1 (standard) - 5 (option)IDE Interface

Non RAID Configuration

1 channel Ultra ATA100

2 channel S-ATA 150External interface

Keyboard MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)Mouse MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)USB 2.0 (2 ports)Serial D-sub 9-pin (2 ports)Network RJ45 - 10/100/1000BASE-TX (2 ports)Video 1 port

BIOS Phoenix BIOS ISA Flash ROM 4 MBPower On Self Test (POST)

A - 1

Page 208: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix A

External dimensions (including stabilizers)

292mm width x 696.5mm height x 453mm depth

Weight 20 kg (35kg Max.)Power supply 2 * hot-swap redundant 570W PSUEnvironmental requirements

Temperature 10 to 35°CHumidity 20 to 80% RH (no condensation)

Table A - 1: 120Lh Specifications (Continued)Express 5800 120Lh

A - 2

Page 209: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix B

Appendix BB00

Interrupt Reguests and I/O Port AddressThe factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below. Find anappropriate one to install an optional device.

Interrupt RequestsThe factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:

I/O Port AddressThe factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:

Table B - 1: Interrupt RequestsIRQ Peripheral Device

(Controller)IRQ Peripheral Device

(Controller)

0 System timer 9 -1 Keyboard 10 PCI2 - 11 PCI3 COM B 12 Mouse4 COM A 13 Numeric processor 5 PCI 14 Primary IDE6 Floppy disk 15 Secondary IDE7 Parallel 16 USB8 Real-time clock

Table B - 2: I/O Port AddressAddress* Chip in Use**00 – 1F DMA controller

20 – 2D Interrupt controller

2E – 2F Super I/O configuration

30 - 31 Interrupt controller

34 - 35 Interrupt controller

38 - 39 Interrupt controller

3C - 3D Interrupt controller

40 – 43 Timer controller

4E - 4F Super I/O configuration 2

50 - 53 Timer/counter

60 Keyboard/mouse

61 Non-maskable interrupt62 LPC reserve

B - 1

Page 210: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix B

* Hexadecimal notation** I/O port address for PCI devices can be arbitrarily assigned according to the typeand number of PCI devices

63 Non-maskable interrupt64 Keyboard/mouse70 - 77 Real time clock, Non-maskable interrupt 80 – 91 DMA1 controller92 Port 9293 - 97 DMAA0 – A1 Interrupt controllerA4 - A5 Interrupt controllerA8 - A9 Interrupt controllerAC - AD Interrupt controllerB0 - B1 Interrupt controllerB2 - B3 Advanced power managementB4 - B5 Interrupt controllerB8 - B9 Interrupt controllerBC - BD Interrupt controllerC0 – D1 DMA controllerD2 - DF DMA controllerF0 Coprocessor errorF1 - FF Logic device configuration170 – 177 IDE secondary bus controller1F0 – 1F7 IDE primary bus controller2F8 – 2FF Serial port 2376 IDE secondary bus controller370 – 377 (Floppy disk drive 2), IDE 2378 - 37F Parallel port3F0 – 3F5 Floppy disk drive3F6 IDE primary bus controller4D00 - 4D1 Interrupt controller678 - 67D Parallel portCA2 - CA3 BMC SMS interfaceCA4 - CA5 BMC SMS interfaceCF8 – CFB PCI configuration address/reset control

(CF9)CFC - CFF PCI configuration data

Table B - 2: I/O Port Address (Continued)Address* Chip in Use**

B - 2

Page 211: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

Appendix C

MaintenanceThis chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions whenrelocating or storing the server.

Making Backup CopiesWe recommend you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks ofthe server on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server andbackup tools, consult with your sales agent.

When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select"System Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line MaintenanceUtility to make a backup copy of the system information.

Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in thearray configuration. When your hard disks have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it isrecommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data. To make a backupcopy of the configuration data, use the configuration utility that is resident in theFLASH memory on the optional disk array controller board. Refer to the manualsupplied with the board.

CleaningClean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape.

Warning■ Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server

■ Do not look into the CD-ROM drive

■ Do not remove the lithium battery

■ Disconnect the power plug before working with the server

Caution■ Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions

■ Make sure to complete board installation

■ Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap

C - 1

Page 212: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

Cleaning the Server For cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow theprocedure below if stains remain on the surfaces:

Caution■ To avoid altering the material and color of the server, do not

use volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to cleanthe server.

■ The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on therear panel of server, and the inside of the server must bekept dry. Do not moisten them with water.

1. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off). 2. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet. 3. Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.4. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm

water, and squeeze it firmly.5. Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4. 6. Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, wipe the server with it once again.7. Wipe the server with a dry cloth.8. Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry

cloth.

Cleaning the Interior One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular andthorough cleaning of the interior of the server, especially around the motherboard.

Dust buildup inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermalinsulator, a buildup can prevent proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten thelife of server components. Also, dust may contain conductive or corrosive materialsthat can cause short circuits or corrosion of electrical contacts.

How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment inwhich it is located. For most office environments, you probably should clean the serverevery 12 months. For more severe environments, clean the interior every 6 months.

Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing theright side door. You will need a small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle andelectrostatic protection), computer grade canned air, and a small brush for cleaning theinterior.

Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.

C - 2

Page 213: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

Warning■ Unplug all power cords.

■ Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Volt-age is present inside the server and display unit even after thepower is turned off. All voltage is removed only when the powercord is unplugged.

CautionDo not use a brush made of chemical fabric, or a cleaningmaterial that will generate electrostatic discharges.

1. Turn off the server and unplug all power cables. 2. Remove the right side door.3. Remove the dust accumulate on the air inlet of the front and the rear fan. 4. Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the mother board.5. Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the mother

board.6. Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from

the interior of the server.7. Reinstall the right side door.8. Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.

Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off), and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth.

The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation.To keep the mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the stepsbelow to clean the mouse regularly:

1. Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry softclothes, and cotton swabs.

C - 3

Page 214: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

2. Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).3. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise

to remove it.4. Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your

hand, and turn your hand holding the mouse (the mouse is on your palm withthe button upward). The mouse ball is released onto your palm.

5. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarmwater, and squeeze it firmly.

6. Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the clothprepared in Step 5.

7. Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.8. Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with

alcohol. Wipe stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of thecotton swab.

9. Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.10. Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.11. Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.

Cleaning optical drives A dusty optical drive or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read datacorrectly.

Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and optical drive regularly:

1. Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit). 2. Press the CD tray Open/Close button on the front of the optical drive. The tray

opens.3. Hold the CD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.

Note: Do not touch the signal side of the optical drive withyour hand.

4. Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.

CautionDo not wipe the lens of the optical drive. Doing so may damagethe lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.

C - 4

Page 215: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

5. Push the tray to close it. 6. Wipe the signal side of the optical drive with a dry soft cloth.

CautionWipe CD-ROMs from the center to the outside. Use onlyCD-ROM cleaner if necessary. Cleaning a CD-ROM withrecord spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner causes damage tothe CD-ROM contents. At worst, inserting the CD-ROM into the server may causefailure.

C - 5

Page 216: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

System DiagnosticsThe System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.

Use the System Diagnostics program in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM providedwith the server to diagnose the server.

Test Items The following items are tested in system diagnostics.

■ Memory

■ CPU cache memory

■ Hard disk used as a system

CautionWhen executing the System Diagnostics, make sure to removethe LAN cable. Executing the System Diagnostics with the LAN cableconnected, the network may be influenced.

Note: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into thedisk.

Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics There are two ways to diagnose the server: to use the local console (keyboard) of theserver itself, and to use the management PC via serial port (remote console).

CautionTwo methods of LAN via the serial port are mentioned in Appendix E"NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" in the way of communicating in remoteconsole. Use the serial port to execute System Diagnostics with remoteconsole. The LAN connection is not for System Diagnostics.

Procedures to start the diagnostics program is as follows:

1. Shutdown the OS, and turn off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.

C - 6

Page 217: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

2. Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.3. Plug the power cord and turn on the server.4. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to reboot the server. See

appendix E "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for details. The following menuappears when started the server using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

5. Select [Tools].

6. Select [System Diagnostics]. The System Diagnostics starts and completes inapproximately three minutes. When the diagnosis completes, the test windowtitle shows "Test End", as the following figure.

If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics, the test result shows "AbnormalEnd" in red color. Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis which erroroccurred. Take a note of the error message showed, and contact your sales agent.

Local console Remote console

Table C - 1: System Diagnosis Test Window ItemsItem DescriptionDiagnosis tool title shows a name of this diagnosis and Version information.Test windows title shows the progress of diagnosis. When it completes, it shows "Test

End"Test Result shows the information including time of start, end and progress, and

result of the diagnosis.Guide line shows a description of keys to navigate the windowTest window Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the diagnosis

[Enter] Detail Information [ESC] Return to Enduser Menu

Test End

TeDoLi(TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00(Build020901.1.1m)

<System>MEM Memory 16 count NormalEndCACHE Cache 49 count NormalEnd<SCSI>HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W 89 count NormalEnd

Start10:06:58 End 10:09:58 Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00Test End : NormalEnd 03 AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00

Guide line

Test window

Test result

Test windows titleDiagnosis tool title

C - 7

Page 218: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

7. Follow the Guide line showed in the bottom of the screen and press ESC toshow the End user Menu showed below.

8. Select <Reboot> in the End user Menu above. The Express Server restarts, andNEC EXPRESSBUILDER boots the system.

9. Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.

10. Turn off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.11. Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server.12. Plug the power code.

This completes the System Diagnostics.

Table C - 2: End User MenuItem Description<Test Result> shows the screen of the diagnosis completed aforementioned<Device List> shows the information of all the devices connected<Log Info> shows the log information and error messages of the diagnosis. It can

be saved to a floppy disk. To save the log information to a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk to a floppy disk drive and select <Save[F]>

<Option> change where to output log<Reboot> Restarts the Express Server

Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.

Enduser Menu

TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)

<Test Result><Device List><Log Info><Option><Reboot>

C - 8

Page 219: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

Relocating/Storing The ServerFollow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:

WarningObserve the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure tofollow these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or propertydamage.

■ Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.

■ Do not install the server in any place other than specified.

■ Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cordof the server plugged to a power source.

Caution■ If the server needs to be relocated/stored due to a change in

the floor layout to a great extent, contact the sales agent.

■ Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data inthe hard disk, if any.

■ Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disks to relocated theserver if the contains any.

1. Take a floppy disk and a CD-ROM out of the server, if any.2. Power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).3. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.4. Remove all the cables from the server.5. Hold the server by its bottom with at least three persons to carry the server.

WarningDo not hold the front door to lift the server. The front door may be disengaged from the server, causingpersonal injury.

6. Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.

C - 9

Page 220: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix C

C - 10

Page 221: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Appendix D

Installing the Operating System with Express Setup

This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure thefollowing operating systems to the server.

■ Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 Standard Edition/ Microsoft® Windows®Server 2003 Enterprise Edition

■ Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server/ Microsoft® Windows® 2000 AdvancedServer

To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section, contactyour service representative.

CautionBefore installing the operating system, adjust the system dateand time by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP." See Chapter3 for detail.

About Express Setup"Express Setup" contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM is intendedfor initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the user easilythrough the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screenprompts for software selection and configuration. The program loads the utilities anddrivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the desired operatingsystem.

CautionExpress Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server sys-tem. Therefore, it clears the contents of the hard disk.

D - 1

Page 222: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

For Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000, Express Setup automaticallyconfigures your server and installs the operating system. After a few tasks arecompleted, all that remains to be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and set the Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledgethe license agreement.

For the other operating systems, Express Setup initializes the target disk(s), creates themaintenance partition, and installs the various maintenance utilities from theNEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to lead your server to ready-to-install for thedesired operating system.

Express Setup uses the "Configuration Diskette". The Configuration Diskette is afloppy disk that includes the configuration information for the server setup used in theautomatic installation mode. Express Setup will perform all the process of the setupusing the information in the floppy disk. During this procedure, you do not have to bein front of the Express server to verify the state of the setup. Also, using the sameConfiguration Diskette used before allows you to re-setup your server with the samecondition as before.

Express Setup includes two types of installation method.

■ Quick start

Quick start uses the Configuration Diskette on which the configuration parametersfor server setup were pre-loaded before starting the Express Setup. Theconfiguration parameters are loaded by using the Configuration Diskette Creator.

■ Normal start

Normal start is used to create the Configuration Diskette after starting the ExpressSetup.

D - 2

Page 223: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Note:■ You can create Configuration Diskette in advance using

"Conf igurat ion Disket te Creator" inc luded in NECEXPRESSBUILDER.

■ If you create Configuration Diskette in advance, you canabbreviate the items that is necessary to input or select dur-ing Express Setup. (You can also create or modify the setupinformation restored in Configuration Diskette duringExpress Setup.) If you have a computer other than yourservers that is running with Windows 95/98/Me/XP, WindowsNT 3.51 or later, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003,we recommend you to edit setup information from the com-puter in advance using Configuration Diskette Creator.

Microsoft Windows Server 2003This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003Standard Edition in the server. Read instruction in this section before proceeding theinstallation.

Installation Notice

This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginningthe installation in order to install Windows Server 2003 correctly.

Supported Operating System on this Model

The server supports the following edition:

■ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/ Microsoft Windows Server2003 Enterprise Edition (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows Server 2003")

On installing other operating systems, contact sales dealer or the maintenance servicerepresentative.

BIOS Specification

Before installing Windows Server 2003, verify if the BIOS specification of thehardware is correct. See Chapter 3 to specify them.

NEC ESMPRO Agent

On Windows Server 2003 systems, the ESMPRO Agent needs the necras.sys driver. Toinstall the necras.sys, run the System update from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

D - 3

Page 224: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Windows Server 2003

Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system. However, note thefollowing issue:

Caution■ Before starting the installation, complete all the process of

adding the optional device and the setup of Express servermainframe (BIOS and optional board specification)

■ After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for SolvingProblems" described later to specify the settings for troublerecovery such as "Specifying Memory Dump".

Installing on the Mirrored Volume

If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "DiskManagement", disable the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to thebasic disk, and enable the mirroring again after the installation has completed.

Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in"Computer Management".

Connecting Hard Disk Drive

Connect an hard disk drive on which the operating system is not going to be installedafter installing the operating system.

If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to "Re-installing theoperation system when multiple logical drives exist".

Creating Partition Size

The minimum size for the partition where the system is to be installed can be calculatedfrom the following formula.

Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size

Size necessary to install the system= 2900 MB

Paging File Size (Recommended)= Mounted Memory Size × 1.5

Dump file Size= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB

D - 4

Page 225: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Caution■ The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug

information (memory dump). If you set the default value ofpaging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, theaccurate debug information (memory dump) may not be col-lected.

■ The maximum paging file size which can be set on one parti-tion is 4095 MB. If the above paging file size exceeds4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.

■ The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB mem-ory mounted is “2048MB + 12MB”.

■ If you install any application program or the like, add neces-sary space to the partition to install these programs.

For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the minimally required partitionsize will be calculated by the above formula as follows:

2900 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) = 4192 MB

Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk

You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard diskupgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained.

If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix F to re-install thesystem.

Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as "EISA")

In disk area, an area displayed as "EISA" may exist. This area is maintenance partitionfor saving configuration information and utilities. Do not delete the area.

D - 5

Page 226: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Setup Flow

This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup.

*1 The process is operated only when Disk Array Controller Board is connected and the configuration is specified.*2 If you select [Others], the process is completed here.

Installing Windows Server 2003

This section describes how to setup the system using Express Setup.

Preparing the Configuration Diskette. You can proceed to the installation if you do nothave the Configuration Diskette prepared in advance, but one floppy disk formatted byMS-DOS 1.44 MB is necessary in such case. For the Configuration Diskette, prepare afloppy disk.

Disk Array Configuration *1↓ Restart ↓ Creating Maintenance Partition ↓ Restart ↓ Installing Utilities ↓ Restart ↓ *2 Creating OS Partition ↓ Restart ↓ Formatting OS Partition ↓ Copying NEC Modules ↓ Copying Selected Application Modules

Read notes and restrictions.

Confirmed Go back

Select how to install

Yes

Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.

Confirmed

Select Setup Parameter File.

No

Retrieve again Existing File

Select OS

New FileTerminate

Check Setup Parameter FileIf you need to

reset the specification

Correct

Confirm the setting/select whether or not to modify

Confirm the specification and input the value.Re-select

OK

Incorrect

No Yes

Insert Windows CD-ROM

After restarting the computer, the installation

completed.

Express Setup ↓ Log on Automatically

: Process that continues automatically

: Process that need to input or select

Agree Software License Agreement

D - 6

Page 227: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Caution■ If you modified the system configuration, run "System

Update".

■ If you want to modify or add Graphics Accelerator Driver orthe drivers of Network Adapter and so on, see Appendix F.

1. Turn the power of peripheral devices on, and then turn on the server.

Note:■ Connect the hard disk drive on which the operating system

is not going to be installed after installing the operating sys-tem.

■ If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to"Re-installing the operation system when multiple logicaldrives exist" (Appendix F).

2. Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC

EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot theserver.)The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.

5. Click [Express Setup]."Note" will be displayed.

6. Read the instruction carefully and click [OK].The message "Insert Configuration Diskette" appears.

7. Insert "Configuration Diskette" into floppy disk drive and click [OK].

Note: If you do not have "Configuration Diskette", insert ablank floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk driveand click [OK].

[Using the specified Configuration Diskette]The Setup File included in "Configuration Diskette" will be displayed.

a. Select the Setup File name to use during the installation.

D - 7

Page 228: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Note: If there is any problem that can not be modified inthe Setup File you selected, the message to set another"Configuration Diskette" appears. In such case, verify thefloppy disk you inserted.

After the Setup File is specified, the message "Do you want to reviewor modify the Setup File parameters?" is displayed.

b. If you want to edit the information file, click [Review]. If you do notwant to edit the information file and continue the installation, click[Skip].Click [Review]. Go to step 8.Click [Skip]. Go to step 9.

[Using Blank disk]a. Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.

The input box appears.b. Input the file name.

[Operating System to Install] appears.The OS supported by the computer is displayed in the list.

c. Select [Windows Server 2003] you want to install from the list box.

8. Verify the contents specified during OS installation.If Disk Array Controller Board is connected to Express server mainframe, the[Configure RAID] screen appears. Verify the specification, modify ifnecessary, and then click [Next].Next, [Basic Information] screen appears. Verify the specification, modify ifnecessary, and then click [Next]. ("Supported Computer" shown in the screendiffers according to the model.)After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] on the screen to continue. Modify thespecification each time if necessary.

Caution■ Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the mini-

mally required size.

■ If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAIDConfiguration", the information included in the first partition(excluding maintenance partition) will all be formatted anddeleted. The information included in the other partition willbe retained. The figure below describes the partition which

D - 8

Page 229: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

information will be deleted when maintenance partitionexists.

■ You can not re-install the system with the existing partitionthat is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select"Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration".

■ If "Create New Partition" at "New/Existing RAID Configura-tion" is selected, do not specify the value for the partitionmore than 120 GB.

■ If you specify other than 4095 MB for the "Installing Parti-tion", it is necessary to convert to NTFS.

■ If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration"is selected but the partition other than the one to installWindows Server 2003 does no t ex is t (exc lud ingmaintenance partition), Express Setup will reserve themaximum area of the hard disk to install Windows Server2003.

■ You cannot go to the next screen if the specification is incor-rect.

■ On specification, an error may occur in relationship with thespecified contents of the former screen and require to goback to modify the specification.

■ During the setup, the screen to specify the partition whereWindows Server 2003 is to be installed appears. The first55 MB area displayed on the screen is a partition that isused to store the configuration information or utilities uniqueto the server. We do not recommend to delete this area, butif you do not want to reserve this 55 MB area, perform theinstallation by manual setup. It is impossible to delete thisarea by Express Setup.

■ If you specify other than 120 GB for the actual area, you maynot create the partition specified as the entire area in sizesmore than 120 GB.

Note: ■ If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen

will go back to select the Setup File. [Cancel] exists only in[Basic Information] screen.

■ If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setupautomatically selects default value for the later specificationto continue the installation.

When all the specification has completed, the system reboots automatically.

First Partition<Maintenance Partition>

Retained

SecondPartitionDeleted

ThirdPartitionRetained

FourthPartitionRetained

D - 9

Page 230: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

9. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy diskcorresponding to the mass storage driver into floppy disk drive and follow themessage to operate the installation.

10. Follow the message and take NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM andConfiguration Diskette out of the CD-ROM drive, and insert Windows Server2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.[Software License Agreement] screen appears.

11. Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. Ifyou do not agree, click [I disagree] or press F3.

Caution■ If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates

and Windows Server 2003 will not be installed.

■ If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified toinstall, the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gate-way (and Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specifythe appropriate value.

Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.

Installing and Setting Device Drivers

Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.

PROSet

PROSet is a utility that verifies the function of network contained in network driver.

Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:

■ Verify detailed information of the adapter.

■ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.

■ Setup of teaming.

Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerantenvironment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.

PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.

Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.

* Procedure with the standard start menuClick Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].

D - 10

Page 231: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

* Procedure with the classic start menuClick Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click

[Windows Explorer].3. Run "PROSet.exe" in the following directory.

CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PROSet\WS03XP32The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.

4. Click [Next].5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].7. Click [Install].8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].9. Restart the system.

Network Driver

Specify the details of network driver.

One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but thelink speed and duplex mode need to be specified manually.

[When PROSet is not installed]

1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.* Procedure with the standard start menu

a. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections],and Click [Local Area Connection].

* Procedure with the classic start menua. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].

The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.b. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-

up menu.2. Click [Configure].

The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.3. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as

the value specified for HUB.4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.

[When PROSet is installed]

1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.* Procedure with the standard start menu

Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].* Procedure with the classic start menu

a. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].b. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.

D - 11

Page 232: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.3. Click the [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the

same as the value specified for HUB.4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].

Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.

You can process in the property dialog box for local area network which can bedisplayed from [Network and Dial-up Connection].

Note: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (orthe packet)that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sendsor receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing networktrouble. For information on how to install the tool, see the"Setting for Solving Problems" described later in this chapter.

Optional Network Board Driver

If you want to use an optional Network Board (Intel Pro/1000F and Intel Pro/1000XTGigabit adapter), the network driver will be installed automatically. Therefore, thedriver attached to the Network board should not be used.

If you want to use an optional Network Board, install the driver stored in NECEXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

In case of using a 100MB adapter

"CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PRO100\WS03XP32"If the installation procedure is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described inthe section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".

CautionIf you want to use optional Network Board "Intel Pro/1000 XT",open the [Advanced] in PROSet window and change the [Off-load TCP Segmentation] value to "Off".

Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver

1. Start Device Manager.2. Click [Network adapters] and Double-Click [(Network Adapter Name)].

[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] is displayed.

Note: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Boardadapter. All other names show the Optional Network Board.

D - 12

Page 233: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

3. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...]. [Hardware Update Wizard]is displayed.

4. Select the [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] radio button andclick [Next].

5. Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and checkoff the [Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.

6. Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using a100Mb adapter, specify[CD-ROM driveletter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PRO1000\WS03XP32].Then click [Next].

7. Click [Finish].

Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)

Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more thanone adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the otheradapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter.

Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more thanone adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from theserver by all the adapters.

This feature includes AFT feature.

Caution■ AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers

and restarting the system.

■ All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teamingmust exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to theseparate switches, they will not work normally.

If you want to utilize AFT/ALB feature, follow the procedure below to setup.

1. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] on the [Control Panel] dialog box.The [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box appears.

D - 13

Page 234: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

2. Put the mouse cursor on "Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Network Connection" in thelist and right-click.Pull-down menu appears.

3. Select [Add to Team>] and then click [Create New Team...].The [Teaming Wizard] dialog box appears.

4. Select "Adapter Fault Tolerance" or "Adaptive Load Balancing" and click[Next].

5. Check the adapter to join the team and click [Next].6. Click [Finish].7. The setup will go back to [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box,

so click [OK].8. Restart the system.

Installing SCSI Controller Driver

If you use SCSI controller driver (INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller /Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI), install it according to the followingprocedure:

1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu\ [Control Panel]\ [AdministrativeTools]\ [Computer Management].

2. Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists asunknown device.

3. Click [Update Driver].4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or

specific location [Advanced]" and click [Next].5. Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].6. Click [Have Disk.].7. Insert "Windows 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the

floppy disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click[OK].

8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].[INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller][Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI]

The installation of the driver is completed.

Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.

Graphics Accelerator Driver

Update Graphics Accelerator Driver mounted in standard.

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows

Explorer]3. Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory.

<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\VIDEO\RADEON7000\W2K3\SETUP.EXE*Install the graphics accelerator driver in the following directory if you

D - 14

Page 235: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

communicate your server with the remote KVM console. (Optional advanced remote management card must be installed in your server to use the remote KVM console.)<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\VIDEO\RADEON7000\SETUP.EXE

4. Follow the message to continue the installation.5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive,

follow the direction on the screen and restart the system.

Setting for Solving Problems

Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from anytrouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur.

Memory Dump (Debug Information)

This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information)in the server.

Caution■ The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge

of collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specifythe memory dump.

■ If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, themessage to inform that the system is in short of virtual mem-ory may appear, but continue to start the system. If you re-start the system in such case, memory dump may not bestored correctly.

Follow the procedure below to specify.

1. Select [Control Panel] and click [System].The [System Properties] dialog box is displayed.

2. Select [Advanced] tab.3. Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.

Caution■ To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug

information is recommended.If the installed memory size is larger than 2 GB, "CompleteMemory Dump" cannot be specified, then specify "KernelMemory Dump" instead.

■ Specify the drive where there is a free area more than thesize of "the memory capacity installed on Express server +12 MB".

D - 15

Page 236: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

■ In case the installed memory size exceeds 2 GB due to theadded memory, change the write debugging information to[Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size ofdebugging information (memory dump) to be taken alsochanges due to adding memory. Verify the size of the emptyspace in the debugging information (memory dump) writedestination drive.

4. Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the [Writedebugging information] group box.e.g.Write the debug information in D drive in the file named MEMORY.DMP.

D:\MEMORY.DMP5. Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.

The [Performance Options] window is displayed.6. Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to the value

larger than [Recommended], and click [Set].

Caution■ Be sure to create memory dump with the size described

above on the OS partition. If [Default Size] of the paging fileis specified to the value smaller than "Recommended" value,the correct debug information (memory dump) may not becollected.

■ For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Parti-tion Size to be Created" described earlier.

■ To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, werecommend you to press dump switch to verify that thedump will be collected normally in advance.

■ In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file tosuit the new memory size.

9. Click [OK].The message to restart the system may appear according to the modifiedspecification. In such case, follow the message to restart the system.

Windows Dr. Watson

Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error isdetected,

Dr. Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow theprocedure below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.

1. Click [Run] on Start menu.

D - 16

Page 237: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.

3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path]box.The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name"DRWTSN32.LOG".

Note: You cannot specify network pass. Specify the passon local computer.

4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.

Note: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be readwith Windows Debugger.

5. Check the following check box on the [Option] box.o Dump Symbol Tableo Dump All Thread Contextso Add To Existing Log Fileo Create Crash Dump FileFor more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.

6. Click [OK].

Network Monitor

Using Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. Touse Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation hascompleted, so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network troublemay occur.

1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].The [Control Panel] dialog box is displayed.

2. Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box is displayed.

3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box is displayed.

D - 17

Page 238: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

4. Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the componentON and click [Next].

5. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM intothe CD-ROM drive and click [OK].

6. Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.7. Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.8. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.

To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click[Network Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer toOnline Help.

Updating the System

Update the system in the situation below:

■ Modified system configuration.

■ Recovered the system using recovery process.

Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g.Administrator) and insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROMdrive.

[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen is displayed, right-click the item.Click [Update the System] from the menu and the setup will start. Follow the on-screeninstructions.

Making Backup Copies of System Information

The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specificinformation for the server.

Save the information after completing the system setup.

Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.

You can save the information by the following process.

1. Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and rebootthe system.

2. Select [Tools].3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].4. Select [System Information Management].5. Insert a diskette in the floppy disk drive.6. Select [Save].

Exceptional Setup

This section explains how to setup with the exceptional way. You usually do not haveto do as follows. If your system has any mass storage device, you have to set as followsdepending on your system. The detailed information is provided by the manual of themass storage device.

D - 18

Page 239: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Installation of mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup

If you would like to install or re-install the OS when the system has new mass storagedevice not to be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.

1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting theserver.

2. If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID systembefore running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

3. Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.4. (a) When the dialog of Disk array configuration is displayed, check "Use

Existing Array".(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for mass storage device".

5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.Set the FD attached the mass storage device to the FD drive.Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the ExpressSetup.

Microsoft Windows 2000This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® 2000 in theserver. Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation.

Note: If you install Windows 2000 without using ExpressSetup, see Appendix F

Installation Notice

This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginninginstallation in order to install Windows 2000 correctly.

Supported Operating System on this Model

The server supports the following edition:

■ Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows 2000")

On installing other operating system, contact sales dealer or the maintenance servicerepresentative.

Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver

To install optional mass storage driver, see appendix E to create setup inf file.

BIOS Specification

Before installing Windows 2000, verify that the BIOS specification of the hardware iscorrect. On BIOS specification, there are some items to specify for the new functionsprovided from Windows 2000 (Plug and Play, support for USB interface and so on).See Chapter 3 to specify them.

D - 19

Page 240: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

NEC ESMPRO Agent

On Windows 2000 systems, the ESMPRO Agent needs the necras.sys driver. To installthe necras.sys, run the System update from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

Windows 2000

Express Setup can install Windows 2000 operating system. However, note thefollowing issue:

Caution■ Before starting the installation, complete all the process of

adding the optional device and the setup of Express servermainframe (BIOS and optional board specification)

■ The document for installing Windows 2000 is also attachedto the other software package which is sold separately, butrefer to this document when you install Windows 2000 onthis model.

■ After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for SolvingProblems" described later to specify the settings for troublerecovery such as "Specifying Memory Dump".

Installing on the Mirrored Volume

If you want to install Windows 2000 on the volume that is mirrored using "DiskManagement", invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to thebasic disk, and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed.

Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in"Computer Management".

Connecting Hard Disk Drive

Connect the hard disk on which the operating system is not going to be installed afterinstalling the operating system.

If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to "Re-installing theoperation system when multiple logical drives exist" (Appendix F).

Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as "MAINTE_P")

In disk area, an area displayed as "MAINTE_P" may exist. This area is maintenancepartition for saving configuration information and utilities. Do not delete the area.

D - 20

Page 241: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Creating Partition Size

The minimum size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculatedfrom the following formula.

Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size

Size necessary to install the system= 1000 MB

Paging File Size (Recommended)= Mounted Memory Size × 1.5

Dump file Size= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB

Caution■ The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug

information (memory dump). If you set the default value ofpaging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, theaccurate debug information (memory dump) may not be col-lected.

■ The maximum paging file size which can be set on one parti-tion is 4095 MB. If the above paging file size exceeds4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.

■ If you install any application program or the like, add neces-sary space to the partition to install these programs.

For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the minimally required partitionsize will be calculated by the above formula as follows:

1000 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) = 2292 MB

Notes: If you want to install using Express Setup, calculatethe minimally required partition size as follows:

■ If you do not apply Windows 2000 Service PackThe larger value of either one: 'Minimum Partition Size'described above, or '4095 MB'.

■ If you want to apply Windows 2000 Service PackThe larger value of either one: 'Minimum Partition Size'described above + 850 MB or '4095 MB'.

Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk

You cannot re-install Windows 2000 with the current partition of the hard diskupgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained.

If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix F to re-install thesystem.

D - 21

Page 242: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Setup Flow

This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup.

*1 The process is operated only when Disk Array Controller Board is connected and the configuration is specified.*2 If you select [Others], the process is completed here.

Installing Windows 2000

This section describes how to setup the system using Express Setup.

Prepare the Configuration Diskette. You can proceed to the installation if you do nothave the Configuration Diskette prepared in advance, but one floppy disk formatted byMS-DOS 1.44 MB is necessary in such a case. For the Configuration Diskette, use theblank disk in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER package or prepare other floppy diskpersonally.

Disk Array Configuration *1↓ Restart ↓ Creating Maintenance Partition ↓ Restart ↓ Installing Utilities ↓ Restart ↓ *2 Creating OS Partition ↓ Restart ↓ Formatting OS Partition ↓ Copying NEC Modules ↓ Copying Selected Application Modules

Read notes and restrictions.

Confirmed Go back

Select how to install

Yes

Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.

Confirmed

Select Setup Parameter File.

No

Retrieve again Existing File

Select OS

New FileTerminate

Check Setup Parameter FileIf you need to

reset the specification

Correct

Confirm the setting/select whether or not to modify

Confirm the specification and input the value.Re-select

OK

Incorrect

No Yes

Insert Windows CD-ROM

After restarting the computer, the installation

completed.

Express Setup ↓ Log on Automatically

: Process that continues automatically

: Process that need to input or select

Agree Software License Agreement

D - 22

Page 243: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Caution■ If you modified the system configuration, run "System

Update".

■ If you want to modify or add Graphics Accelerator Driver orthe drivers of Network Adapter and so on, see Appendix F.

1. Turn the power of peripheral device on, and then turn on the server.

Notes: ■ Connect the hard disk on which the OS is not going to be

installed after installing OS.

■ If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to"Re-installing the operation system when multiple logicaldrives exist" (Appendix F).

2. Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC

EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot theserver.)The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.

5. Click [Express Setup]."Note" will be displayed.

6. Read the instruction carefully and click [OK].The message "Insert Configuration Diskette" is displayed.

7. Insert "Configuration Diskette" into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].

Note: If you do not have "Configuration Diskette", insert ablank floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk driveand click [OK].

[Using the specified Configuration Diskette]The Setup File included in "Configuration Diskette" will be displayed.

a. Select the Setup File name to use during the installation.

D - 23

Page 244: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Note: If there is any problem that cann not be modified inthe Setup File you selected, the message to set another"Configuration Diskette" appears. In such case, verify thefloppy disk you inserted.

After the Setup File is specified, the message "Do you want to reviewor modify the Setup File parameters?" is displayed.

b. If you want to edit the information file, click [Review]. If you do notwant to edit the information file and continue the installation, click[Skip].Click [Review] → Go to step 8.Click [Skip] → Go to step 9.

[Using Blank disk]a. Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.

The input box is displayed.b. Input the file name.

[Operating System to Install] is displayed.The OS supported by the computer is displayed in the list.

c. Select [Windows 2000] you want to install from the list box.

8. Verify the contents specified during OS installation.If Disk Array Controller Board is connected to Express server mainframe, the[Configure RAID] screen is displayed. Verify the specification, modify ifnecessary, and then click [Next].Next, [Basic Information] screen is displayed. Verify the specification, modifyif necessary, and then click [Next]. ("Supported Computer" shown in the screendiffers according to the model.)After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] to continue. Modify the specificationeach time if necessary.

Caution■ Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the mini-

mally required size.

■ If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAIDConfiguration", the information included in the first partition(excluding maintenance partition) will all be formatted anddeleted. The information included in the other partition willbe retained. The figure below describes the partition whichinformation will be deleted when maintenance partitionexists.

D - 24

Page 245: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

■ You cannot re-install the system with the existing partitionthat is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select"Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration".

■ If "Create New Partition" at "New/Existing RAID Configura-tion" is selected, do not specify the value for the partitionmore than 120 GB.

■ If you specify other than 4095 MB for the "Installing Parti-tion", it is necessary to convert to NTFS.

■ If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration"is selected but the partition other than the one to install Win-dows 2000 does not exist (excluding maintenance partition),Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the harddisk to install Windows 2000.

■ You cannot go to the next screen if the specification is incor-rect.

■ On specification, an error may occur in relationship with thespecified contents of the former screen and require to goback to modify the specification.

■ During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Win-dows 2000 is to be installed is displayed. The first 55 MBarea displayed on the screen is a partition that is used tostore the configuration information or utilities unique of theserver. We do not recommend to delete this area, but if youdo not want to reserve this 55 MB area, perform the installa-tion by manual setup. It is impossible to delete this area byExpress Setup.

■ If you specify other than 120 GB for the actual area, you maynot create the partition specified as the entire area in sizesmore than 120 GB.

Notes: ■ If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen

will go back to select the Setup File. [Cancel] exists only in[Basic Information] screen.

■ If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setupautomatically selects default value for the later specificationto continue the installation.

When all the specification has completed, the system reboots automatically.

First Partition<Maintenance Partition>

Retained

SecondPartitionDeleted

ThirdPartitionRetained

FourthPartitionRetained

D - 25

Page 246: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

9. Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy diskattached to mass storage driver into floppy disk driver and follow the messageto operate the installation.

10. Follow the message and take NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM andConfiguration Diskette out of the CD-ROM drive, and insert Windows 2000CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.[Software License Agreement] screen is displayed.

11. Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. Ifyou do not agree, click [I disagree] or press F3.

Caution■ If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates

and Windows 2000 will not be installed.

■ If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified toinstall, the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gate-way (and Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specifythe appropriate value.

12. If you selected [Apply] on [Apply Service Pack] at Basic Information, followthe procedure below.

a. Follow the message to take Windows 2000 CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive.

b. Follow the message to insert Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 or later intothe CD-ROM drive.

Windows 2000 and the specified application will be installed automatically andlogon to the system. Install and configure the device drivers.Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.

Installing and Setting Device Drivers

Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.

PROSet

PROSet is a utility that verifies the function of network contained in network driver. Besure to install it. Using PROSet enables the following issues:

■ Verify detailed information of the adapter.

■ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.

■ Specify teaming.

Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server an environmenttolerant on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.

PROSet is necessary to use these features.

D - 26

Page 247: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Follow the procedure below to install PROSet:

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.2. Click Start menu, point to [Program], [Accessory] and click [Explorer].3. Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.

<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PROSET\WIN2KThe [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.

4. Click [Next].5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].7. Click [Install].8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].9. Restart the system.

Network Driver

[When PROSet is not installed]

1. Click Start menu and click [Network and Dial-Up Connection].The [Network and Dial-Up Connection] dialog box is displayed.

2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.

3. Click [Configure].The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.

4. Click [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as thevalue specified for HUB.

5. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.6. Click [OK] on the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box.

Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary. You can operate the processfrom [Network and Dial-up Connection] to display the property dialog box for localarea network.

Note: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (orthe packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sendsor receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing networktrouble. For information on how to install the tool, see the"Setting for Solving Problems" described later in this chapter.

[When PROSet is installed]

1. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.The [Intel(R) PROSet] dialog box is displayed. Double-click the[Intel(R) PROSet] icon.

D - 27

Page 248: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

2. Put the cursor to the network driver in the list.3. Click [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the

value specified for HUB.Also specify the other network driver with the same procedure as above.

Optional Network Board Driver

If you want to use an optional Network Board (Intel Pro/1000F and Intel Pro/XTGigabit adapter), install the driver stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

Refer to the re-installation procedure described in Appendix F.

Network Driver for 100MB adapters

[<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PRO100\WIN2K]

Network Driver for Gigabit adapters

[<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PRO1000\WIN2K]

Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)

Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more thanone adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the otheradapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter.

Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more thanone adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from theserver by all the adapters.

This feature includes AFT feature.

Caution■ AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers

and restarting the system.

■ All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teamingmust exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to theseparate switches, they will not work normally.

If you want to use AFT/ALB feature, follow the procedure below to setup.

1. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] on the [Control Panel] dialog box.The [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box appears.

D - 28

Page 249: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

2. Put the mouse cursor on "Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Network Connection" in thelist and right-click.Pull-down menu appears.

3. Select [Add to Team>] and then click [Create New Team...].The [Teaming Wizard] dialog box appears.

4. Select "Adapter Fault Tolerance" or "Adaptive Load Balancing" and click[Next].

5. Check the adapter to join the team and click [Next].6. Click [Finish].7. The setup will go back to [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box,

so click [OK].8. Restart the system.

Installing SCSI Controller Driver

If you use SCSI controller driver (INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller /Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI), install it according to the followingprocedure:

1. Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel]→[Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].

2. Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists asunknown device.

3. Click [Update Driver].4. When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Display a list of the

known drivers for this device so thai I can choose a specific driver" and click[Next].

5. Select [SCSI and RAID controllers], Click [Have Disk.].6. Click [Have Disk.].7. Insert "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the

floppy disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click[OK].

8. Specify the following driver and click [Next].[INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller][Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI]

The installation of the driver is complete.

Restart the system according to the message displayed on the screen.

Graphics Accelerator Driver

Update Graphics Accelerator Driver mounted in standard.

If you want to use optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the documentattached to the board to install the driver.

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

D - 29

Page 250: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [WindowsExplorer].

3. Run "Setup.exe" in the following directory.<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\VIDEO\W2K\setup.exe.*Install the graphics accelerator driver in the following directory if youcommunicate your server with the remote KVM console. (Optional advancedremote management card must be installed in your server to use the remoteKVM console.)<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\VIDEO\RADEON7000\Setup.exe

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the installation.If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." is displayed,select [Yes] to continue.If the dialog message "Direct X ver. 8 isn’t installed.” displays, select[Continue] to continue.

5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive,follow the on-screen instructions and restart the system.

USB 2.0 Driver

USB 2.0 Driver is pre-installed.

When restoring the system or re-installing the system, the driver is automaticallyinstalled in the process of updating the system.

Setting for Solving Problems

Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from anytrouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur.

Memory Dump (Debug Information)

This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information)in the server.

CautionCautions for the Memory Dump

■ The staff of maintenance service representative is in chargeof collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specifythe memory dump.

■ If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, themessage to inform that the system is in short of virtual mem-ory may appear, but continue to start the system. If you re-start the system in such case, memory dump may not bestored correctly.

Follow the procedure below to specify.

1. Point to [Settings] in Start menu and click [Control Panel].

D - 30

Page 251: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.2. Double-click [System].

The [System Properties] dialog box appears.3. Click [Advanced].4. Click [Startup and Recovery].5. Enter the location to write the debug information to the text box.

e.g. Write debug information in D drive in the file named "MEMORY.DMP".D:\MEMORY.DMP

Caution■ It is recommended to specify "Complete Memory Dump" to

write the debug information. If the installed memory size islarger than 2 GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot bespecified, then specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.

■ Specify the drive where there is a free area bigger than thesize of "the memory capacity installed on the Express server+ 12 MB".

■ In case the installed memory size exceeds 2 GB due to theadded memory, change the write debugging information to[Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size ofdebugging information (memory dump) to be taken alsochanges due to adding memory. Verify the size of the emptyspace in the debugging information (memory dump) writedestination drive.

6. Click [Performance Options].7. Click [Change] on the [Virtual Memory] dialog box.8. Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging File Size for Selected Drive] box to the

value larger than [Recommended Size], and click [Specify].

Caution■ Be sure to create memory dump with the size described

above on the OS partition. If [Default Size] of the paging fileis specified to the value smaller than "Recommended" value,the correct debug information (memory dump) may not becollected.

■ For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Parti-tion Size to be Created" described earlier.

■ To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, werecommend you to press dump switch to verify that thedump will be collected normally in advance.

D - 31

Page 252: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

■ In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file tosuit the new memory size.

9. Click [OK].The message to restart the system may appear according to the modifiedspecification. In such case, follow the message to restart the system.

Windows 2000 Dr. Watson

Windows 2000 Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application erroris detected, Dr. Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log).Follow the procedure below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.

1. Click [Run] on Start menu.2. Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].

The [Dr. Watson for Windows 2000] dialog box appears.3. Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.

The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name"DRWTSN32.LOG".

Note: You cannot specify network pass. Specify the passon local computer.

4. Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.

Note: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be readwith Windows Debugger.

5. Check the following check box on the [Option] box. Dump Symbol Table Dump All Thread Contexts Add To Existing Log File Create Crash Dump File

For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.6. Click [OK].

Network Monitor

Using Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. Touse Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation hascompleted, so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network troublemay occur.

1. Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].The [Control Panel] dialog box is displayed.

D - 32

Page 253: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

2. Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box is displayed.

3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box is displayed.

4. Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the componentON and click [Next].

5. If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows 2000 CD-ROM into theCD-ROM drive and click [OK].

6. Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.7. Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.8. Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.

To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click[Network Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer toOnline Help.

Updating the System - Installing Service Pack

Update the system in the situation below:

■ Modified system configuration.

■ Recovered the system using recovery process.

Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g.Administrator) and insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROMdrive of the server.

[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen is displayed, right-click the item.Click [Update the System] from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow theon-screen instructions to continue the setup process and apply Service Pack.

Making Backup Copies of System Information

The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specificinformation for the server.

Save the information after completing the system setup.

Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.

You can save the information by the following process.

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive andreboot the system.

2. Select [Tools].3. Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].4. Select [System Information Management].5. Insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.6. Select [Save].

D - 33

Page 254: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Exceptional Setup

This section explains how to setup with the exceptional way. You usually do not haveto do as follows. If your system has any Mass storage devices, you have to set asfollows depending on your system. The detailed information is provided by the manualof the Mass storage device.

Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup

If you would like to install or re-install the OS when the system has new mass storagedevice not to be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.

1. Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting theserver.

2. If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID systembefore running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

3. Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.4. (a) When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears, check "Use Existing

Array".(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".

5. Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.Insert the floppy disk attached to the mass storage device into the floppy diskdrive.Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the ExpressSetup.

HostRAID

The following is an overview of HostRAID and explains the setup procedure.

Overview of HostRAID

HostRAID provides RAID feature through the onboard serial ATA interface in yoursystem.

HostRAID consists of the driver that controls disk arrays and "Adaptec StorageManager - Browser Edition" (hereinafter referred to as "ASMBE") that is a disk arraymanagement utility.

The software products are mandatory for HostRAID to function normally. Be sure toinstall both software products. For the driver, refer to the setup procedure explained inthis manual. For ASMBE, refer to the "HostRAID™ (SATA) Adaptec StorageManager™ Browser Edition User's Guide."

D - 34

Page 255: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

Overview of the specifications

Features

■ HostRAID supports the hot swap function for the hot plug insertion (HotSwap) ofhard disk drives.

■ HostRAID enables the BIOS utility to select the disk array/standard SATA for eachchannel.

■ Since the JAVA-based management utility ASMBE uses the browser (IE5.5 orlater), the software does not need to be installed into each client PC formanagement. (The software must be installed in each server.)

Notes

The following explains general notes on HostRAID:

For notes on the BIOS setup utility, refer to Chapter 3 of this manual. For notes onASMBE, refer to HostRAID™ (SATA) Adaptec Storage Manager™ Browser EditionUser's Guide.

Note: You may view or print the HostRAID AdaptecStorage Manager™ Browser Edition User's Guide from theNEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

■ Only a hard disk drive can be connected to a channel with which HostRAID isenabled through the BIOS setup utility.

■ To connect a device other than a hard disk drive, disable HostRAID and use it asthe standard SATA.

■ In addition to driver installation, ASMBE installation is mandatory for usingHostRAID functions. For the installation of ASMBE, refer to the "HostRAID™(SATA) Adaptec Storage Manager™ Browser Edition User's Guide."

Hard disk drive: Four hard disk drives for each channel (+ two spare drives)

RAID level: RAID0, RAID1, or RAID 10 (0 + 1)

Operating system: Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Stan-dard Edition/Enterprise EditionMicrosoft Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server

Configuration Method of disk arrays: BIOS utility, NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and ASMBE

D - 35

Page 256: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

■ If you replace a hard disk drive being used with HostRAID, let 60 seconds or morepass after removing the hard disk drive, and then install a new hard disk drive.If the interval is too short, an unexpected event may occur. (You should install anew hard disk drive after confirming the removal of the old hard disk drive on theASMBE window.)

■ HostRAID does not permit the use of the standby/hibernation mode of ACPIfunctions.

■ Use ASMBE to maintain HostRAID, but do not use any other utilities.

■ After rebuilding by using hot spare, do the rebuilding again to make the installationpositions of hard disks and the configuration of an array using the disks same asthose before the configuration of the array. Without the operation, the boot prioritymay be changed. The priority can be changed by the SCSISelect Utility.

■ Create at least one OS partition in the array you have created. If the OS partitiondoes not exist, the Verify may be executed for the array at the system boot.

■ The timeout message below may be recorded into the event log if I/O operation isdelayed while HostRAID is running with a high load applied. However, HostRAIDinternal processing retries the I/O processing, and the delay does not influence APand system operations.Event source:a320raid.sysEvent ID: 9Description:The device \Device\Scsi\a320raid* did not respond within timeoutperiod. (*: Arbitrary)

■ When Hot Spare Rebuild is performed, please perform Rebuild again to becomethe original hard disk mounting position and the same position. If this work is notdone, a boot priority may change. A boot priority can be changed in BIOS.

■ Please create OS partition, if RAID is created. When there is no OS partition,Verify with Fix may operate.

D - 36

Page 257: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

HostRAID Setup Flow

The flowchart below shows the HostRAID system setup procedure.

*1 You can create RAID by using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. In this case, the only thing you need to do is to set the HostRAID featureto "Enabled" by using SCSISelect utility.

*2 ASMBE User's Guide: HostRAID Adaptec Storage ManagerTM Browser Edition User's Guide.

You may view or print the HostRAID™ (SATA) Adaptec Storage Manager™ BrowserEdition User's Guide from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.

Start

Is HostRAID used as boot disk?

No

Yes

Enable the HostRAID feature and create RAID by

using BIOS setup utility

Enable the HostRAID feature and create RAID

by using SCSISelect Utility

Refer to Chapter 4*1. Refer to Chapter 4*1. Install driver (install OS). Install driver.

See Appendix D of this guide.

Update system.

See this chapter.

Create the support disk by using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and install the HostRAID driver with the Windows hardware wizard.

Install ASMBE. Install ASMBE.

See ASMBE User's Guide*2.

See ASMBE User's Guide*2.

Install Standby/Hibernation Lock driver.

Install Standby/Hibernation

Lock driver.

See appendix of ASMBE User's Guide*2.

See appendix of ASMBE User's Guide*2.

End End

D - 37

Page 258: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix D

D - 38

Page 259: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix E

Appendix E

Installing and Using UtilitiesThis section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comeswith your server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

NEC EXPRESSBUILDERNEC ExpressBuilder is an automated software integration tool that helps simplify theprocess of installing and configuring your server. It provides a flexible, guidedinstallation process for system administrators to install Microsoft® Windows® 2000 orMicrosoft® Windows ServerTM 2003.

To install other operating systems, please contact your service representative for theserver certified operating systems.

Note: Before using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initialsetup, complete the hardware configuration.

NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes three distinct programs. One can be booted underDOS for initial setup, and one is for use under Windows operating system.

■ DOS-based with local console

Used to set up the server at the first time. This program is also used to diagnose theserver and to install/uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partitionof the system drive.

■ DOS-based with remote console

Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the serverover the network or via serial port B.

E - 1

Page 260: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix E

Note:

■ Before using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup, com-plete the hardware configuration.

■ This menu is displayed only when an optional remote man-agement card is installed in your system.

■ No keyboard connected to the server is permitted to run thisprogram.

■ Windows-based

This program is called as "Master Control Menu" that can run under the MicrosoftWindows system (Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You caninstall the several applications and read the documentation from the menu.

E - 2

Page 261: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix E

NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local ConsoleThis subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER forDOS-based with local console.

Starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER

The following procedure instructs you to start NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

CautionDo not remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM whileNEC EXPRESSBUILDER is running.

1. Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM supplied with your server into

the CD-ROM drive of your server.3. Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC

EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot theserver.) NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu.

DOS-Based ExpressBuilder Menus

Express Setup

"Express Setup" is intended for initial setup of the server. Its automatic installationmode guides the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware featuresand providing screen prompts for software selection and configuration. The programloads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs thedesired operating system.

E - 3

Page 262: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix E

If you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, after a few tasks are completed,all that remains to be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM andinstall the Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledge thelicense agreement.

Caution■ The Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the

server system and, therefore, the Express Setup clears thecontents of the hard disk.

■ Once Express setup is started, do not remove "Configura-tion Diskette" from the floppy disk drive without any direc-tions.

E00

Tools

"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It allows more installationoptions than Express Setup and permits the user to quickly create utility support disks,run the Off-line Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic utility, set up a maintenancepartition, and update the various BIOS programs.

Table E - 1: Tools MenuNEC Express5800 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Ver3. xxxx-x Copyright (C) NEC Corporation 2004Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data RAID Board: Present

Total Drives: 1

Drives in Group: 1

Hot Spares: 1

RAID Level: 7

Write Mode: WRITE_THRU

Maint Part: Present

Off-line Maintenance UtilitySystem DiagnosticsCreate Support DiskSetup Maintenance PartitionBIOS/FW/etc. UpdateInitialize Remote Management CardSystem ManagementHelpReturn to the Top Menu

E - 4

Page 263: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

Appendix F

Installing Windows 2000This section describes the procedures for installing Windows 2000 without using theExpress Setup tool.

Before Installing Windows 2000Please read carefully the following information BEFORE starting your Windows 2000Installation.

Installing Service Pack

You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached toyour system, prepare it by yourself.

Updating System

If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with theEXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM delivered with your system.

Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk

If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard diskupgraded to Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:

■ Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install theOS newly.

■ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.

Partition Size

The minimum required partition size for installation of Windows 2000 is:

1000MB + Paging file size + Dump file sizePaging file size (recommended) = installed memory * 1.5Dump file size = Installed memory size + 12 MB

Caution■ The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug

information (memory dump). If you set the default value ofpaging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, theaccurate debug information (memory dump) may not be col-lected.

■ The maximum paging file size which can be set on one parti-tion is 4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds4095MB, specify 4095MB for the paging file size.

F - 1

Page 264: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

■ The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB mem-ory mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.

■ If you install any application program or the like, add neces-sary space to the partition to install these programs.

For example, if installed memory size is 512MB, the minimum required partition sizeis 1000 + (512*1.5) + (512+12) = 2292MB.

Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as writtenbelow will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.

1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size". 2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file

size) is to be written to a separate disk.(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to bewritten, then after installing the system using the "Size required for installation+ Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)

Installing Windows 2000 Preparations for Installation

■ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM

■ Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (CD-ROM)

■ Windows 2000 Service Pack (CD-ROM)

■ User's Guide

■ Getting Started

■ Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER

Creating "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"

Before installing, create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

Note: If you have already "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK forNEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for Express5800 Server which youare going to install Windows 2000, you do not need to create itagain.

You can create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with thefollowing two procedures.

■ Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server withNEC EXPRESSBUILDER.If you have only Express5800 Server to create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK forNEC EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.

F - 2

Page 265: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

If Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on Express5800 Server, youcan use the other procedure described later.Follow the steps below.

1. Prepare three 3.5-inch floppy disks. 2. Turn on your Express5800 Server.3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the

server.4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server.(You

may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDERstarts.

5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].6. Select [Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from

[Create Support Disk] menu.7. Insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the

screen.Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.

■ Create from [Master Control Menu] [Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.

- Windows Server 2003

- Windows 2000

- Windows Me/98/95

- Windows NT 4.0

- Windows XP

You can create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from[Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which the above operatingsystems operate.

Follow the steps below.

1. Prepare three 3.5-inch floppy disks. 2. Run the operating system. 3. Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the

server. [Master Control Menu] will display.

4. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then[for Windows 2000].

Note: You can do the same operation with the menuappeared by the Right-click.

F - 3

Page 266: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message. Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created. Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.

Windows 2000 Clean Installation

This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows 2000.

1. Turn on the system power. 2. Insert the Windows 2000 CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.

After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, pressEnter while the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at thetop of the screen. If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step isunnecessary. The Windows 2000 setup screen will display. If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly. Begin after turning on the system power again.

4. Press F6 during a few seconds while the following message displays:"Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration..."

Note: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 hasbeen pressed.

5. When the following message is displayed, press S.

“Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devicesinstalled in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.”

The following message is displayed.

“Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer-supplied hardware support diskinto Drive A: *Press ENTER when ready.”

6. Insert the Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into thefloppy drive, and press Enter.A list of mass storage devices is displayed.Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000) and press Enter.You then go back to step 5.

7. If the RAID controller (including embedded HostRAID feature) or SCSIcontroller is installed, select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.■ Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver Ver 1.02 For Windows 2000/XP/2003.

■ MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 RAID Controller.

■ MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAID Controller.

■ Adaptec I2O RAID Driver Disk for 32bit Windows 2000/XP/2003.

F - 4

Page 267: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

When installation is complete, be sure to follow the procedures described in "DriverInstallation and Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this manual.

Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drivesThis subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if themultiple logical drives exist.

Before Re-installing the Operation System

Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.

Re-installing the Operation System

1. Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.2. Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when

the following message appears: The following list shows the existing partitions andunpartitioned space on this computer.Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list. * Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm theproper drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.

3. Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlierin this chapter. The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of theprevious system. If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according tothe "Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter".

Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter

Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with thefollowing procedure.

1. Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start[Computer Management].

2. Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.3. Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the

[Change Drive Letter and Path...].4. Click [Yes].5. Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to

assign.6. Click [OK].7. If the following message appears, click [Yes].

Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to nolonger run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?

8. Close the [Computer Management].

F - 5

Page 268: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

Updating the System - Installing Service Pack -

To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the followingprocedures.

1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which isa member of the Administrators group.

2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive. Master Control Menu automatically displays on the screen.

3. Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click on [Update NECExpress5800 system] section.

4. Continue your work for system update as the following message.5. Click on [Restart Computer] to restart the system.6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive

immediately after clicking on [Restart Computer]

CautionIf you change the configuration of the system (by adding orremoving hardware or Operating system software components)or repair the system, you must run the system update again.

Driver Installation and Advanced SettingsThis section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted onthe device.

For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in thissection, please refer to the document attached to the driver.

PROSet

PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.Using PROSet enables the following issues:

■ Confirm detailed information of the adapter.

■ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.

■ Specify teaming.

Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server an environmenttolerant on any trouble and enhance through put between the switches.

PROSet is necessary to use these features.

Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

F - 6

Page 269: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

2. Click Start menu, point to [Program], [Accessory] and click [Explorer]. 3. Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.

<CD-ROM DriveLetter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PROSET\WIN2K\The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.

4. Click [Next].5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].7. Click [Install].8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window displays, click [Finish].9. Restart the system.

Network Driver

[When PROSet is not installed]

1. Click Start menu and click [Network and Dial-Up Connection].The [Network and Dial-Up Connection] dialog box appears.

2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.

3. Click [Configure].The property dialog box for network adapter appears.

4. Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same asthe value specified for HUB.

5. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter. 6. Click [OK] on the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box.

Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary. You can operate the processfrom [Network and Dial-up Connection] to display the property dialog box for localarea network.

Note: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (orthe packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sendsor receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing networktrouble. For information on how to install the tool, see the"Setup for TroubleProcess" later in this document.

[When PROSet is installed]

1. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] on the [Control Panel] window.The [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box displays.

2. Put the cursor on the network driver in the list.3. Click [Advanced] and set the [Link Speed & Duplex] value same as the value

specified for HUB. Also specify the other network driver with the same progress above.

F - 7

Page 270: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix F

Re-install the Network DriverAfter installing OS and deleting the network drivers, if you want to re-install thenetwork drivers, follow the procedure below.

1. Restart OS and logon to your system.2. [Upgrade Device Driver Wizard] dialog box appears.

Click [Next].3. Confirm that the [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)]

radio button is selected and click [Next].4. Select the [Specify a location] check box and deselect other check boxes.

Click [Next].5. Other [Upgrade Device Driver Wizard] dialog box opens.

When using [Intel(R) PRO/1000CT Network Connection], specify [<CD-ROM drive letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PRO1000\WIN2K].Then click [OK].

6. Click [Next].7. Click [Finished].

After re-installing the network drivers, the link speed and Duplex mode needto be specified.Refer to "Network Driver" described earlier.

Display Driver

Install the display driver using the following procedure.

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows

Explorer].3. Run “SETUP.EXE” in the following directory:

<CD-ROM drive Letter>:\WINNT\VIDEO\RADEON7000\W2K\setup.exe".Install the graphics accelerator driver in the following directory if youcommunicate your server with the remote KVM console (optional advancedremote management card must be installed in your server to use the remoteKVM console.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.If the message "Digital Signature Not Found" message displays, click on [Yes]to continue. If the dialog message “Direct X Ver.8 isn’t installed.” displays,select [Continue] to continue.

5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the systemfollowing the on-screen instruction.

USB 2.0 Driver

USB 2.0 Driver is pre-installed. When restoring the system or re-installing the system,the driver is automatically installed in the process of updating the system.

Setting for Collecting Memory DumpSet for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.

F - 8

Page 271: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

Appendix G

Installing Windows Server 2003This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 withoutusing Express Setup tool.

Before Installing Windows Server 2003Please read carefully the following information BEFORE beginning your WindowsServer 2003 Installation.

Installing Service Pack

You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not deliveredwith your system, prepare it by yourself.

Updating System

If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with the NECEXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM delivered with your system.

Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk

If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard diskupgraded to Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:

■ Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as thepartition to install the operating system newly.

■ Select "Use the current File System" for the format of operating system partition.

MO Device

If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during theinstallation, the file system will not be converted normally. Disconnect the MO Deviceand restart the installation from the beginning.

Partition Size

The minimum required partition size for installation of Windows Server 2003 is:

■ 2900 MB + Paging file size + Dump file size

■ Paging file size (recommended) = installed memory * 1.5

■ Dump file size = Installed memory size + 12 MB

G - 1

Page 272: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

Caution■ The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug

information (memory dump). If you set the default value ofpaging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, theaccurate debug information (memory dump) may not be col-lected.

■ The maximum paging file size which can be set on one parti-tion is 4095 MB. If the above paging file size exceeds4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.

■ The dump file size for a system with more than 2 GB mem-ory installed is '2048 MB + 12 MB'.

■ If you install any application program or the like, add neces-sary space to the partition to install these programs.

For example, if installed memory size is 512 MB, the minimum required partition size is:

2900 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) = 4192 MB.

Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as writtenbelow will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.

1. Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".2. See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file

size) is to be written to a separate disk.(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written,then after installing the system using the "Size required for installation +Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)

Installing Windows Server 2003You will need the following for Windows Server 2003 installation:

■ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM

■ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/ Microsoft Waindows Server2003 Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM)

■ User's Guide

■ Getting Started

■ Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER

Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"

Before ins ta l l ing , c rea te Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NECEXPRESSBUILDER.

G - 2

Page 273: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

Note: If you already have "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for Express5800 Server onwhich you are going to install Windows Server 2003, you do notneed to create it again.

You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER withthe following two procedures.

■ Create from the menu which is displayed when running Express5800 Server withNEC EXPRESSBUILDER.

If you have only Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISKfor NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.

If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on NECExpress5800 Server, you can use the other procedure described later.

Follow the steps below:

1. Prepare three 3.5-inch floppy disks.2. Turn on your Express5800 Server.3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.4. Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the server.(You

may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.

5. Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].6. Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER]

from [Create Support Disk] menu.7. Insert a diskette in the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.

Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will becreated.Write-protect and label the diskette, then keep it in a safe place.

■ Create from [Master Control Menu]

[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.

- Windows Server 2003

- Windows 2000

- Windows Me/98/95

- Windows NT 4.0

- Windows XP

G - 3

Page 274: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDERfrom [Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which one of the aboveoperating system operates.

Follow the steps below:

1. Prepare three 3.5-inch floppy disks.2. Run the operating system.3. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

[Master Control Menu] will be displayed.4. Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then

[for Windows Server 2003].

Note: You can do the same operation using the menu dis-played by a right-click.

5. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will becreated.Write-protect and label the diskette, then keep it in a safe place.

Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation

This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.

1. Turn the system on.2. Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.3. Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.

After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, pressEnter while the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at thetop of the screen.If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will be displayed.If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.Retry after turning the system off then on again.

4. Press F6 during a few seconds while the message “Setup is inspecting yourcomputer’s hardware configuration...” displays on the upper part of the screen.– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration..." is displayed.– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.

CautionThere is no visible indication on screen when F6 has beenpressed.

G - 4

Page 275: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

5. When the following message is displayed, press S.

The following message is displayed.

6. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDERinto the floppy drive, and press Enter.A list of mass storage devices is displayed.

7. Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI cards (Win XP/Server 2003 IA-32) andpress Enter.You then go back to Step 5.

8. If the RAID controller (including embedded HostRAID feature) or SCSIcontroller is installed, select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.■ Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver Ver 1.02 For Windows 2000/XP/2003.

■ MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 RAID Controller.

■ MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAID Controller.

■ Adaptec I2O RAID Driver Disk for 32bit Windows 2000/XP/2003.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

When installation is complete, be sure to follow the procedures described in "DriverInstallation and Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" later in this manual.

Upgrade installationProcedures below upgrade the installed Windows 2000 to Windows Server 2003.

1. Power on the system and start Windows 2000.2. Log on as an administrator.3. Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Then, [Select an operation] dialog will be displayed.

Note: If the [Select an operation] dialog box does notappear, start \SETUP.EXE from CD-ROM drive.

Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.

Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.

Please inert the disk labeled

manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk

into Drive A:

*Press ENTER when ready.

G - 5

Page 276: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

4. Select [Install Windows Server 2003].A dialog box asks to select the upgrade or clear installation.

5. Select "Upgrade (recommended)" and click Next.Follow the messages and continue. The system will automatically restart aftercopying the files.

Note: You can leave the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM inthe CD-ROM drive.

6. Press F6 while the message, "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardwareconfiguration...", is displayed.

CautionThere is no visible indication on screen when F6 has beenpressed.

7. When the following message is displayed, press S.

The following message is displayed.

8. Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER in thefloppy disk drive, and press Enter. A list of mass storage devices will bedisplayed.Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win XP/ Server 2003 (IA-32) andpress Enter.You then go back to step 5.

9. If the optional board is installed, select the proper SCSI Adapter and pressEnter.MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 RAIDMegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAIDFollow the on-screen instructions.

Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices

installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.

Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.

Please inert the disk labeled

manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk

into Drive A:

*Press ENTER when ready.

G - 6

Page 277: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

10. Update the system.11. Install the driver and make detailed settings.

■ If PROSET II is already installed, uninstall the PROSET II before upgrading.

If the teaming function is enabled, disable the function before uninstallingPROSET II.

■ During upgrade installation, [Disk Insert] dialog box may be displayed.

If it is displayed, click Cancel.

■ When upgrade installation is completed, [Device Driver Wizard] dialog box maybe displayed.

If it is displayed, click Cancel, then update the system.

Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drivesThis subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if themultiple logical drives exist.

Before Re-installing the Operation System

Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.

Re-installing the Operation System

1. Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.2. Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when

the following message appears: The following list shows the existing partitions andunpartitioned space on this computer.Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list. * Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm theproper drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.

3. Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlierin this chapter. The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of theprevious system. If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according tothe "Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter".

Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter

Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with thefollowing procedure.

1. Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start[Computer Management].

G - 7

Page 278: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

2. Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.3. Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the

[Change Drive Letter and Path...].4. Click [Yes].5. Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to

assign.6. Click [OK].7. If the following message appears, click [Yes].

Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to nolonger run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?

8. Close the [Computer Management].

Updating the System

To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the followingprocedures.

1. Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which isa member of the Administrators group.

2. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.[Master Control Menu] is automatically displayed on the screen.

3. Click Setup with left mouse button and click Update Express5800 systemsection.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue system update.5. Click Restart Computer to restart the system.6. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive

immediately after clicking Restart Computer.

CautionIf you change the configuration of the system (by adding orremoving hardware or Operating system software components)or repair the system, you must run the system update again.

Driver Installation And Advanced SettingsThis section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on thedevice.

For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section,please refer to the document delivered with the driver.

PROSet

PROSet is a utility that verifies the function of network contained in network driver.

Using PROSet enables the following items:

G - 8

Page 279: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

■ Verify detailed information of the adapter.

■ Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.

■ Setup of teaming.

Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerantenvironment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.

PROSet is necessary to use these features.

Follow the procedure below to install PROSet:

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.2. The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.

■ With the standard start menu, click Start menu and click [WindowsExplorer].

■ With the classic start menu, click Start menu, point to [Programs],[Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].

3. Run "PROSet.exe" in the following directory:<CD-ROM DriveLetter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PROSet\WS03XP32The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.

4. Click [Next].5. Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].6. Choose "Typical" and click [Next].7. Click [Install].8. When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].9. Restart the system.

Network Driver

Specify the details of network driver.

One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but thelink speed and duplex mode need to be specified manually.

[When PROSet is not installed]

1. The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.■ Procedure with the standard start menu

a. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections],and Click [Local Area Connection].

■ Procedure with the classic start menu

a. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.

b. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.

G - 9

Page 280: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix G

2. Click [Configure].The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.

3. Click [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as thevalue specified for HUB.

4. Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.

[When PROSet is installed]

1. The [Intel PROSet] dialog box is displayed.■ Procedure with the standard start menu

a. Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].■ Procedure with the classic start menu

a. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].b. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.

2. Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.3. Click [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same

as the value specified for HUB.4. Click [Apply] and click [OK].

Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.

You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network whichcan be displayed from [Network and Dial-up Connection].

Note: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (orthe packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sendsor receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trou-ble. For information on how to install the tool, see the "Setup forTroubleProcess" later in this document.

Re-install the Network Driver

The network driver will be installed automatically.

USB 2.0 Driver

USB 2.0 Driver is pre-installed. When restoring the system or re-installing the system,the driver is automatically installed in the process of updating the system.

Update Graphics Accelerator Driver Mounted in Standard

1. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

G - 10

Page 281: Nec 120 Lh User guide

110Eh User Guide - Appendix E

2. Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [WindowsExplorer]

3. Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory. <CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\VIDEO\RADEON7000\W2K3\SETUP.EXE* Install the graphics accelerator driver in the following directory if you communicate your server with the remote KVM console. (Optional advanced remote management card (N8115-02) must be installed in your server to use the remote KVM console.)<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\N8115-02\VIDEO\RADEON7000\SETUP.EXE

4. Follow the message to continue the installation.5. Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive,

follow the direction on the screen and restart the system.

Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information)

Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.

G - 11

Page 282: Nec 120 Lh User guide

110Eh User Guide - Appendix E

G - 12

Page 283: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix H

Appendix H

Product Configuration Record TableUse these tables to record pertinent information about your system. You will need someof this information to run the System Setup Utility. Be sure to update these tables whenyou add options.

Record the model and serial numbers of the system components, dates of componentremoval or replacement, and the name of the vendor from whom the component waspurchased. Be sure to record the same information for any components added to thesystem, such as a power supply, hard disk drives, add-in boards, or printers.

Record the model and serial numbers of the unit and system board. The model andserial numbers of the system unit are recorded on a label attached to the rear of the unit.

The location of serial numbers on add-in boards, hard disk drives, and externalequipment, such as video displays or printers, varies from one manufacturer to another.Literature accompanying these products should illustrate or describe the location ofmodel and serial numbers.

H - 1

Page 284: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix H

H00

Table H - 1: Hardware Product Configuration Record TableMain Unit

Model name Serial No. Date Installed

CPU#1#2 Clock Serial No. Date Installed

Memory#1 Size Serial No. Date Installed#2 Size Serial No. Date Installed#3 Size Serial No. Date Installed#4 Size Serial No. Date Installed#5 Size Serial No. Date Installed#6 Size Serial No. Date Installed#7 Size Serial No. Date Installed#8 Size Serial No. Date Installed

MonitorType Model name Serial No.

Date Installed

Hard disk driveBay #1 Type Serial No.

Capacity Date InstalledType number

Bay #2 Type Serial No.Capacity Date InstalledType number

Bay #3 Type Serial No.Capacity Date InstalledType number

Bay #4 Type Serial No.Capacity Date InstalledType number

Bay #5 Type Serial No.Capacity Date InstalledType number

Bay #6 Type Serial No.Capacity Date InstalledType number

5.25-inch DeviceSlot 4 Type Model name Serial No.

Date InstalledSlot 3 Type Model name Serial No.

Date InstalledSlot 2 (Standard ATAPI CD-ROM drive)

Type Model name Serial No.Date Installed

H - 2

Page 285: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix H

Slot 1 Type Model name Serial No.Date Installed

3.5-inch DeviceSlot 1 (standard 1.44MB floppy disk drive)

Size Capacity Serial No.Model name Type number Date Installed

PCI Slot #1Model name Serial No.

Date installed

PCI Slot #2Model name Serial No.

Date installed

PCI Slot #3Model name Serial No.

Date installed

PCI e Slot #4Model name Serial No.

Date installed

PCI e Slot #5Model name Serial No.

Date installed

PCI e Slot #6Model name Serial No.

Date installed

PrinterModel name Serial No.Manufacturer Date installed

Additional Cabinet for DiskModel name Serial No.

Date installed

External Peripheral Device 1Model name Serial No.Manufacturer Date installed

External Peripheral Device 2Model name Serial No.Manufacturer Date installed

External Peripheral Device 3Model name Serial No.Manufacturer Date installed

External Peripheral Device 4Model name Serial No.Manufacturer Date installed

Table H - 1: Hardware Product Configuration Record Table (Continued)

H - 3

Page 286: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Appendix H

Table H - 2: Software Product Configuration Record Table Firmware version

OS

Application of RUR media

Name: Version:

Apply Name: Version:File system FAT HPFS

NTFS OthersBundled software installed

Licensed software installed

Application running when a failure occurred

Remarks

H - 4

Page 287: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Glossary

Glossary

AAC(Alternating Current) The type of current available in wall outlets. All computers mustconvert alternating current to direct current to operate. See also DC.

addressA label, name, or number that identifies a location in computer memory.

BbackupA copy of data for safe-keeping. The data is copied from computer memory or disk to afloppy disk, magnetic tape, or other media.

base memoryAn area of memory between 0 and 640 kilobytes.

baud rateThe speed with which data is transmitted during serial communication. The computer'soperating system and software program must be configured for the same baud rate asthe communication device, such as a serial printer. See also bps.

BIOS(Basic Input/Output System) A program stored in flash EPROM or ROM that controlsthe keyboard, disk drives, video monitor, and other devices. See also flash EPROM,EPROM, and ROM.

bitDerived from BInary digiT, a bit is the smallest unit of information a computer handles.See also byte.

bootThe process of loading the operating system into memory.

byteA group of eight bits.

Ccache memoryA very fast, limited portion of RAM set aside for temporary storage of data for directaccess by the microprocessor.

Glossary - 1

Page 288: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Glossary

CD-ROM drive(Compact Disk ROM drive) A type of mass storage device that reads information froma compact disk.

CMOS(Complimentary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) A type of low-power integrated circuitused in computers. See also TTL.

COM1 or COM2The name you can assign a serial port to set or change its address. See also serial port.

commandAn instruction that directs the computer to perform a particular operation.

configurationThe way in which a computer is set up to operate. Some configurable options includeCPU speed, serial port designation, and memory allocation.

CPU(Central Processing Unit) See microprocessor.

DDC(Direct Current) The type of current available in the rechargeable battery packs used inportable computers. See also AC.

defaultThe factory setting your computer uses unless you instruct it otherwise. For example,when powering up, the computer will boot from the default drive.

device driverA software program that a computer must use to recognize and operate certain hard-ware, such as a mouse or a video monitor.

disk driveA device that stores data on a hard or floppy disk. A floppy disk drive requires a floppydisk to be inserted; a hard disk drive has a permanently encased hard disk.

DOS(Disk Operating System) See operating system.

EECC(Error Checking and Correction) A method of detecting and correcting errors.

expansion slotA connector on the backplane board in desktop computers and expansion boxes thatallows you to install circuit cards.

Glossary - 2

Page 289: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Glossary

extended memoryThe protected memory above 1M that is directly accessible by the microprocessorthrough certain utilities and operating systems.

Ffloppy disk driveSee disk drive.

formatThe process used to organize a hard or floppy disk into sectors so it can accept data.Formatting destroys all previous data on the disk.

FRB (Fault Resilient Boot)A server management feature. FRB attempts to boot the system using the alternate pro-cessor or DIMM.

Hhard disk driveSee disk drive.

hardwareThe physical parts of your computer, including the keyboard, monitor, disk drives,cables, and circuit cards.

hot swapA method used to insert or remove SCSI disk drives into or from an operating bus. Thismethod is typically used in RAID subsystems. When used in non-RAID subsystems theoperating system must typically be restarted.

IIC(Integrated Circuit) An electronic device that contains miniaturized circuitry.

IDE(Integrated Drive Electronics) A type of hard disk drive with the control circuitrylocated inside the disk drive rather than on a drive controller card.

interfaceA connection between the computer and a peripheral device that enables them toexchange data. See also parallel port and serial port.

ISA(Industry Standard Architecture) An industry standard for computers and circuit cardsthat transfer 16 bits of data at a time.

Glossary - 3

Page 290: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Glossary

JjumperA small electrical connector used for configuration on some computer hardware.

LLAN(Local Area Network) A group of computers linked together within a limited area toexchange information.

LED(Light-Emitting Diode) A small electronic device that glows when current flowsthrough it.

LPT1 or LPT2The name you can assign a parallel port to specify its address. See also parallel port.

LVDSuper-fast Ultra 2 SCSI Low Voltage Differential (LVD) Parallel SCSI Interface. Anew SCSI interface that provides greater I/O bandwidth, device connectivity, data reli-ability, and longer cable lengths for Ultra2 SCSI hard disk drives. Note that in order toachieve LVD performance all devices including cable, controller, and drive must sup-port LVD.

MmemoryThe circuitry in your computer that stores data and programs. See also EMS, extendedmemory, RAM, and ROM.

microprocessorThe integrated circuit that processes data and controls the basic functions of the com-puter.

modemA device used to exchange information with other computers over telephone or datalines.

moduleA circuit board that plugs into a dedicated connector on the system board in your com-puter.

mouseA small input device that you guide on a flat surface to control the cursor movementand operation of the computer when using certain software programs.

Glossary - 4

Page 291: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Glossary

NNVRAM(Nonvolatile RAM) A type of RAM that retains its contents even after the computer ispowered off. This memory stores EISA configuration information. See also RAM andSRAM.

Ooperating systemA set of programs that provides the interface between other software programs and thecomputer.

Pparallel portThe connector on the back of your computer that allows the transfer of data betweenthe computer and a parallel device, such as a parallel printer.

partitionThe process of dividing the storage space on a hard disk into separate areas so that theoperating system treats them as separate disk drives.

passwordA security feature that prevents an unauthorized user from operating your computer.See also EEPROM.

PCIPeripheral Component Interconnect. PCI is a high-performance peripherals I/O bussupporting data transfers of up to 528MB per second.

PentiumA type of microprocessor, with a built-in math coprocessor, cache memory, and mem-ory and bus controllers, that processes and communicates 32 bits of data at a time. Thismicroprocessor also contains power management capabilities.

peripheralA device connected to and controlled by the computer, such as an external disk drive ora printer.

POSTPower-On-Self-Test.

Rreal-time clockThe IC in your computer that maintains the time and date.

Glossary - 5

Page 292: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Glossary

ROM(Read-Only Memory) A type of memory device that usually is used to store systemBIOS code. This code cannot be altered and is not lost when the computer is poweredoff. See also BIOS, EPROM, and flash EPROM.

SS-ATASerial Advanced Technology Attachment: standard for connecting hard drives intocomputer systems. An evolution of the Parallel ATA physical storage interface, SATAis based on serial signalling technology, a single cable with a minimum of four wirescreating a point-to-point connection between devices.

saveTo store information on a floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape, or some other perma-nent storage device.

SEL(System Event Log) A record of system management events. The information storedincludes the name of the event, the date and time the event occurred and data pertinentto the event. Event data may include POST error codes that reflect hardware errors orsoftware conflicts within the system.

serial portThe connector on the back of your computer that allows the transfer of data betweenthe computer and a serial device, such as a mouse, a modem, or a serial printer.

softwarePrograms with specific functions, such as word processing, data base management,communications, and operating system.

system boardThe main circuit board in your computer. It contains most of the connectors and ports.

Ttape driveA type of storage device using magnetic tape.

VVGA(Video Graphics Array) A type of video display system that provides high-resolutiontext and graphics on analog color monitors.

Glossary - 6

Page 293: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Index

Index

Numerics5.25-inch Devices .................................4-33

Installing .........................................4-34Removing .......................................4-38

AAdvanced Menu .....................................3-8

BBattery ..................................................4-64Beep Codes ...........................................5-28BIOS Revision Level ...........................5-29BIOS Setup Utility .................................3-3BMC .....................................................4-59Board Management Controller .............4-59Boot Menu ............................................3-18

CCD-ROM Drive ....................................2-27Chassis Features .....................................1-3Configuring

MotherBoard Jumpers ....................3-25Cooling Fan Unit ..................................4-22CPU Fan ...............................................4-18

DDIMM

Installing .........................................4-54Removing .......................................4-54

Disk Array Configuration .....................4-45

EExit Menu .............................................3-19EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM ..........1-20

FFan

CPU ................................................4-18Features ..................................................1-3

Standard Features ...........................1-15Floppy Disk Drive ................................2-26Front Door ............................................2-25

HHard Disk Drive ..................................... 4-8Hot Swap Fan

Installing ........................................ 4-26Hot-Swap Fan

Removing ....................................... 4-25

IInstalling

DIMM ............................................ 4-54PCI Board ....................................... 4-39Processor ........................................ 4-47Processor Air Duct ........................... 4-7RAID Controller Board .................. 4-44

Internal View ......................................... 1-9Interrupt Requests ................................. B-1

MMain Menu ............................................. 3-5Motherboard ......................................... 1-10MotherBoard Jumpers

Configuring .................................... 3-25

PPassword

clearing and changing .................... 3-26PCI Board

Installing ........................................ 4-39Removing ....................................... 4-39

PowerConnecting Power Cord ................. 2-31Forced Power Off ........................... 2-35Off .................................................. 2-34On ................................................... 2-33

Problem Solving ............... 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8Processor

Installing ........................................ 4-47Removing ....................................... 4-47

Processor Air DuctInstalling .......................................... 4-7Removing ......................................... 4-6

RRAID

Configuring RAID ......................... 3-24RAID Controller Board

Installing ........................................ 4-44

Index - 1

Page 294: Nec 120 Lh User guide

120Lh User Guide - Index

Removing .......................................4-44Rear View ...............................................1-7Record Table .........................................H-1Redundant Hot-Swap Fan

Removal .........................................4-24Remote Management Card

Installation ......................................4-60Removal .........................................4-63

RemovingDIMM .............................................4-54PCI Board .......................................4-39Processor ........................................4-47Processor Air Duct ...........................4-6RAID Controller Board ..................4-44

Resetting .................................................5-3Server ...............................................5-3

SSCSI Controller Board .........................4-46SCSISelect Utility ................................3-20Security Menu ......................................3-13Server

Resetting ...........................................5-3Server Menu .........................................3-15Specifications ........................................A-1System

Configuring ......................................3-2forcing a power shutdown ..............2-35Powering Off ..................................2-34Powering On ...................................2-33

TTroubleshooting .....................................5-4

UUsing the System ..................................2-24

Index - 2

Page 295: Nec 120 Lh User guide
Page 296: Nec 120 Lh User guide